MotoSim EG Ver2016SP1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions thoroughly, and
retain for future reference.
179704-1CD
0
MANUAL NO.
HW0483092
5
DANGER
• This manual explains the MotoSim EG. Read this manual carefully and
be sure to understand its contents before operation.
• General items related to safety are listed in the Chapter 1: Safety of
Controller Instructions. To ensure correct and safe operation, carefully
read Controller Instructions before reading this manual.
CAUTION
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with the protective covers or
shields removed for clarity. Be sure all covers and shields are replaced
before operating this product.
• The drawings and photos in this manual are representative examples
and differences may exist between them and the delivered product.
• YASKAWA may modify this model without notice when necessary due to
product improvements, modifications, or changes in specifications. If
such modification is made, the manual number will also be revised.
• If your copy of the manual is damaged or lost, contact a YASKAWA representative to order a new copy. The representatives are listed on the
back cover. Be sure to tell the representative the manual number listed
on the front cover.
• YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from unauthorized
modification of its products. Unauthorized modification voids your product’s warranty.
• Software described in this manual is supplied against licensee only,
with permission to use or copy under the conditions stated in the
license. No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced in any
form without written consent of YASKAWA.
HW0483092
Notes for Safe Operation
Before using this product, read this manual and all the other related documents carefully to
ensure knowledge about the product and safety, including all the cautions.
In this manual, the Notes for Safe Operation are classified as “DANGER”, “WARNING”, “CAUTION”, or ”NOTICE”.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury. Safety Signs identified by the
signal word DANGER should be used sparingly and only for those
situations presenting the most serious hazards.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury. Hazards identified by the signal
word WARNING present a lesser degree of risk of injury or death
than those identified by the signal word DANGER.
Indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used without the safety
alert symbol as an alternative to “NOTICE”.
NOTICE is the preferred signal word to address practices not
related to personal injury. The safety alert symbol should not be
used with this signal word. As an alternative to “NOTICE”, the word
“CAUTION” without the safety alert symbol may be used to indicate
a message not related to personal injury.
Even items described as “CAUTION” may result in a serious accident in some situations. At
any rate, be sure to follow these important items.
NOTE To ensure safe and efficient operation at all times, be sure to follow all instructions, even if
not designated as “DANGER”, “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
HW0483092
Notation for Menus and Buttons
Descriptions of the programming pendant, buttons, and displays are shown as follows:
Item
Manual Designation
Menu
The menus displayed on screen are denoted with { }.
ex. {TOOL}.
Button
The buttons, check boxes, radio buttons displayed on
screen are denoted with [ ].
ex. [Close]; [Sync] check box; [Fast] radio button.
Description of the Operation Procedure
In the explanation of the operation procedure, the expression "Select • • • " means the following operations:
• To move the cursor to the object item and left-click on it with the mouse.
• To pick out the object item by the tab key and press the Enter key.
(In case of selecting a menu, use arrow keys instead of the tab key to pick out the object
item, then press the Enter key.)
Registered Trademark
In this manual, names of companies, corporations, or products are trademarks, registered
trademarks, or bland names for each company or corporation. The indications of (R) and TM
are omitted.
HW0483092
1
Introduction
1.1 Overview of MotoSim EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1.1 Difference of the operation from 4.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Notice and Restriction about MotoSim EG . . . . . . . 15
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
Optional Function of controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the job created with MotoSim EG on a real controller. . .
Restriction of Function of Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment Required for MotoSim EG . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing MotoSim EG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
15
16
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
MotoSim EG Quick Tour
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2 Cell Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.3 Creation of Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.3.1 Creating a Workpiece and a Workpiece Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Editing Tool Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Adding a Tool Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Adding a Tool Model with the CAD Function .
Reading the HSF Format Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
34
35
35
39
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
45
45
47
48
49
51
52
53
54
54
54
54
2.4 Setting of Target Points (AXIS6 Model) . . . . . . . . . 41
2.5 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Selecting a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teaching the Standby Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Welding Approach Posture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teaching the Welding Start Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teaching the Welding End Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teaching the Torch Retraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning to the Standby Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying Each Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying or Adding Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
HW0483092
3
Offline Teaching Procedure
3.1 Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4
Creating and Editing a Cell
4.1 Creating a New Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.2 Opening a Cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.3 Storing a Cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.3.1 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.3.2 Save As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.4 Exiting a Cell and MotoSim EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.5 Creating a Cell with Actual Robot Data . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.6 Exporting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.6.1 Playback animation file export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.6.2 Exported HTML file display operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5
Display Operations
5.1 MotoSim EG Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.1.1 Ribbon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MotoSim EG button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Mouse Operation Switching Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewpoint Operation Switching Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
65
65
66
70
73
75
77
77
Display Operation
6.1 Viewpoint Operation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.1.1 Viewpoint Operation with the Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Mouse Button Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2 [Preset Viewpoint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewpoint Operation with the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smooth Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
79
79
79
81
81
6.2 Light Manager Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adding and Modifying Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Deleting Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Light Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
HW0483092
6.3 Displaying Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.4 Pick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pick Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pick Object Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Pick method and screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.5 Markup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
Freehand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relocating a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
93
94
95
95
96
96
6.6 Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Creating a Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Deleting a Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Relocating a Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
6.7 Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.7.1 X-Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Displaying the X-Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Deleting the X-Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Changing Display of the X-Cutting Plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.7.2 Y-Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Displaying the Y-Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Deleting the Y-Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Changing Display of the Y-Cutting Plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.7.3 Z-Cutting Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Displaying the Z-Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Deleting the Z-Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Changing the Z-Cutting Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.8 Measure Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.9 Measure Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.10 Measure Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Creating a Dimension Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Deleting a Dimension Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Relocating a Dimension Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.12 Other Display Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.12.1
6.12.2
6.12.3
6.12.4
7
Changing Frame Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dividing a Cell Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robot Settings
HW0483092
109
109
109
110
7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Adding a Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Copying a Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Deleting a Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.2 Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.2.1 Job Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Folder Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Master Job Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Robot Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
115
116
116
116
116
117
117
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
118
118
119
120
7.3 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refresh Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stage Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servo Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Data Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.4.1 Tool Data Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setting the Tool Load Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7.4.2 User Frame Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7.4.3 Robot Calibration Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Creating an Environment using Actual Robot Calibration Files
124
Constructing an Environment with MotoSim EG . . . . . . . . 125
7.4.4 Soft Limit Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.5 Robot Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.5.1 Model Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.5.2 Reach View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.5.3 Robot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.6 Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.6.1 Adding a Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conveyor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.2 Adding a Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.3 Adding a Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.4 Modifying the Soft Limit of a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.5 Moving a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.6 Programming a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input of Coordinates (AxisInput) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.7 Other Operations with devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Signals for Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.8 Conveyor Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.9 Conveyor Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HW0483092
132
132
133
135
136
137
138
139
141
142
145
145
145
147
148
7.7 Cube Area View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.7.1 Displaying the Cube Interference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.7.2 Deleting the Cube Interference Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.7.3 Setting the Cube Interference Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function . .
153
7.8.1 Displaying Robot Range Limit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.2 Editing the Safety Function Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robot Range Limit Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axis Range Limit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axis Speed Monitor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Limit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool Angle Monitor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool Change Monitor Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.3 Displaying the Tool Interference Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.4 Displaying the Robot Approximate Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
153
155
156
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
Tool Functions
8.1 Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.1.1 Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.1.2 Job Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Input of Coordinates (AxisInput) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.2 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.2.1 Position Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work Frame Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fix TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robot Position Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequencer Connection Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3 Variable Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4 Lap Time Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5 Pulse Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.6 Step Interval Time Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.7 Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HW0483092
173
174
174
174
175
175
176
176
177
179
180
182
183
184
188
189
191
192
193
193
194
196
8.3 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.3.1 OLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
OLP Function Pick Method and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Selecting [Position] in the "Move Mode" section: (Other items
set at default). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Selecting [Position] and [Orientation] in the "Move Mode"
section: (Other items set at default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Selecting "Move to External Reference Point". . . . . . . . . . 202
Selecting [CurModel] in the "Operation Object" section. . . 202
8.3.2 Job Editing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
8.3.3 Job Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Limitation of Job Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
8.3.4 Paint Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.3.5 Four Point Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
8.3.6 Tool Renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.3.7 Auto Place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.3.8 Step Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8.3.9 Teaching Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Create, Delete, and Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Color Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
With Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
8.3.10 Robot Position Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.4 Create Model from Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
8.5 Update Job from Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Copying Jobs Between Robots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.6 Export CAD File from Job . . . . . . . . . . 226
8.7 Collision Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
8.7.1 Collision Detection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.2 Collision Model Group Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collision Model Group Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collision Model Group Detail Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.3 Collision Definition Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collision Definition Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
233
233
234
236
236
8.8 Running an External Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
9
Model Editings
9.1 Cad Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
Outline of the Cad Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opacity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teacher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mouse-Driven Model Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Mouse Button Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
240
240
241
241
241
9.2 Creating a New Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Creating a Model from an Existing Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
HW0483092
Creating a Dummy Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
9.3 Editing a Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
9.3.1 Displaying the File Data Editing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.2 Registering a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.3 Part Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYLINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIPE2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXIS6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“Teacher” Section of the Parts Editing Dialog Box. . . . . . .
245
246
247
247
248
248
249
249
250
251
252
252
253
253
254
255
9.4 Editing a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
9.5 Positioning a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
9.6 Editing Multiple Models (Model List) . . . . . . . . . . . 261
9.7 Searching a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
9.8 Saving and Reading a Model Group . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Saving a Model Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Reading a Model Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Syntax of the ModelInfo.dat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
9.9 Changing and Moving the Parent Model . . . . . . . . 265
9.9.1 Changing the Parent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
9.9.2 Moving the Parent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
9.10 Changing a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
9.11 Reading a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
9.12 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option> . . . . 269
CAD Data Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
9.13 Changing the Coordinate Origin of CAD Data
<CADPack Option> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
9.14 CAD Data Export . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
HW0483092
10
Configuration Settings
10.1 Graphical Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smooth Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shadow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame & AXIS6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level of Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating the Level of Detail Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Markup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robot Option Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language and Unit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mouse Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option> . . .
278
278
278
279
279
280
281
282
284
286
287
288
290
10.7.1 CAD Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
10.7.2 IGES/SAT Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
11
Applied Operation
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
11.1.1 What is OLP Function?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Teaching Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Designation in Free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Designation in Vertex Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Designation in Center Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Designation in Edge Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designation with Orientation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designation with Z-Axis Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pick Object Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing of Operation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move to External Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronous Base Axis Move to Target Point. . . . . . . . . .
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
300
302
304
306
310
11.2 User Frame Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Moving with a User Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
11.3 Trace Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
11.3.1 Changing Trace Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
11.3.2 Changing Trace Parent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
11.4 Collision Detection Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Collision model group registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Collision definition registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Start collision detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
HW0483092
11.5.1 Simultaneous Playback of Multiple Robot Jobs . . . . . . . . . . 334
11.5.2 Selection of Simulation Robots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
11.5.3 Synchronization between Robots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
11.6 External Axes Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
11.6.1 External Rotating Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
11.6.2 External Servotrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
11.7 Simulation of Non-Robot Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
11.7.1 Simulation of Non-Robot Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
11.7.2 Translational Motion Setting for External Rotating Axis . . . . 348
11.8 Station Coordination Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
11.8.1
11.8.2
11.8.3
11.8.4
Operational Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVE Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8.5 Synchronized Jog Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8.6 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8.7 Twin Drive Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
350
351
351
351
352
352
353
11.9.1 Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.9.2 System Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration of Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration of Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for Conveyor Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for Conveyor Synchronization Conditions . . . . . .
Layout of Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creation of Workpiece Model and Position of Workpiece .
11.9.3 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation of Conveyor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teaching of Conveyor Synchronization MOVE Instruction
(SYMOVJ, SYMOL, SYMOVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing of Conveyor Synchronization START and END
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.9.4 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playback of Conveyor Synchronization Job. . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirmation of Path Using Pulse Record . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for Spray Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.9.5 Conveyor Soft Limit Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
355
355
355
355
355
356
357
358
358
11.12.1 Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robot and External Axis Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.12.2 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cases of Bad Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
384
385
385
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function . . . . . . . . . . 354
359
359
361
361
361
361
361
11.10 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.11 Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Model File (*.mdl). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Cell File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
11.12 Remote Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
HW0483092
11.13 Fix TCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
12
Appendix
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG
(YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC,
MRC, MRC II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values
Supported by MotoSim EG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
YRC1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
DX200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
DX100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
FS100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
NX100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
NXC100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
YASNAC XRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
YASNAC MRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
YASNAC MRC II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
YASNAC ERC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
12.3 Reading the CAD Data with MotoSim EG. . . . . . 411
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
When the driver has been installed with USB type key
connected to a personal computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
When a older version key driver has been installed over a newer
key driver version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
How to perform a simulation with MotoSim EG using data of
actual robots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Cell file containing HSF files don't display properly . . . . . . 412
MotoSimEG - CadPack Cell file compatibility . . . . . . . . . . 412
Graphic Driver Concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later: Cell
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later: File
Export Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 or later: Cell
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 or later: File
Export Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Docking Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Comparison Table with the New Menu from the Old Menu and
the Old Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
HW0483092
1.1 Overview of MotoSim EG
1 Introduction
1.1
Overview of MotoSim EG
MotoSim EG is a software which has been developed as an offline teaching system for YASKAWA industrial robot MOTOMAN series.
MotoSim EG reduces teaching time requiring an actual robot, supports improvement of productivity and insures operator’s safety by enabling robot teaching on a personal computer.
MotoSim EG is an application software for MS-Windows having excellent operability and
many advantages such as running multiple applications at once.
1.1.1
Difference of the operation from 4.10
The appearance of MotoSim EG Ver5.20 differs greatly from Ver4.10 or before.
Therefore, the difference in the operation method of a main screen is summarized so that the
user before Ver4.10 could get used early.
• Runs two or more MotoSim EG. However, the number of the cells which can be used by
MotoSim EG is one.
• Docking Window
• Quick Access Toolbar
• Comparison Table with the New Menu from the Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
1.2
1.2.1
Notice and Restriction about MotoSim EG
Optional Function of controller
"External Reference Point" and "Station Coordinated Instruction" are only available optional
functions on MotoSim EG.
To use the other optional functions (ex. Relative Job, Coordinated Instruction, etc.), use our
product "MotoSim EG-VRC".
1.2.2
troller
Using the job created with MotoSim EG on a real con-
• MotoSim EG does not check the grammatically errors. So, when loading the jobs created
with MotoSim EG, the errors might be occurred. To check the grammatically errors, use
our prduct "Job Editor" series.
• Robot motion differs with contents of parameter. The parameters of a real controller
(All.prm, tool data, user frame data, etc.) must be used with MotoSim EG. After check the
HW0483092
1.2 Notice and Restriction about MotoSim EG
robot motion sufficiently, the jobs are loaded on a real controller.
NOTE The parameters that come with MotoSim EG (ex. All.prm) can not use on a real controller.
YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from using these files.
1.2.3
Restriction of Function of Controller
• MotoSim EG can not simulate the controller having multi-robot.
• MotoSim EG can not simulate the job in real time.
• MotoSim EG can not simulate CIO.
• The function needed the special hardware (sensor, COMARC, etc.) is disable.
• MotoSim EG can not simulate the coasting range when the robot stops while playback.
• Collision Detection is not supported.
• There is a limit to simulate the instruction. Please refer to section " 12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG (YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC, MRC,
MRC II) ".
• Arrangement variable is not supported. MotoSim EG can not modify and play back the
move command that contain the "p[*]" position data.
• Alias function is not supported. MotoSim EG can not modify and play back the job with
alias.
1.2.4
Accuracy
• Positional Accuracy
When the job made in MotoSim EG-VRC is executed on the real robot, teaching points
may be misaligned by the strain and placement error of work, and the deflection of robot.
So, check the teaching points by NEXT/BACK, and modify them.
• Trajectory Accuracy
The simulated trajectory range is different from the real robot. When the job made in
MotoSim EG-VRC is executed on the real robot, check the teaching points by NEXT/
BACK, and do test running. After sufficient operation check, execute playback.
• Cycle time Accuracy
The simulated cycle time is different from the real robot. If robot job contain the position
level "PL=0" in move command, the resulting cycle time simulation may not provide sufficient accuracy compared to the actual robot.
• Robot model Accuracy
Robot model is only external form, bolt hole and anchor bolt may be left out. Movable
parts other than robot (ex. cable) can not be simulated.
1.2.5
Hardware Requirements
When simulate follow situation, PC with high-end CPU or graphic board may need.
• Many robots are used.
• High-capacity CAD data is used.
• Collision check is used.
HW0483092
1.3 Environment Required for MotoSim EG
1.3
Environment Required for MotoSim EG
To run MotoSim EG, the following hardware and software are required:
OS
Microsoft Windows 10 (64bit)
Microsoft Windows 7 ServicePack1 (32bit / 64bit)
JAPANESE and ENGLISH Windows version are supported only. *1
CPU
Intel ® Core™ 2 Duo or more multi-core processor.
Memory
2 GB or more
Hardware Disk
1 GB or more
Monitor
Supported by MS-Windows
(256 colors or more)
Hardware Key
Used under single user environment.
For details, refer to " 1.4 Hardware Key " in the following section.
Other
Graphic Board for 3D.
*1
MS-Windows 10/7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, USA.
NOTE MotoSim EG may not execute correctly, because of PC model, Graphic Board, other connected peripherals, and installed software, etc.
HW0483092
1.4 Hardware Key
1.4
Hardware Key
For proper operation, connect provided hardware lock key (USB type) to the personal
computer before using this software.
Check and execute <Checking the computing environment> <Installing the driver>
before connecting the key to USB port.
<Checking the computing environment>
Multi-connection of USB type key is not available for one USB port because of hardware
structure. Therefore, only one key can be connected to one USB port. When installing multiple offline software into one personal computer and multi-connectiong USB keys, use the personal computer which is provided same numbers of USB ports as the number of software to
be installed.
<Installing the driver>
NOTE Please install the driver after detaching the all sentinel hardware key from the personal
computer.
Execute "\SentinelDriver\Sentinel System Driver Installer 7.5.9.exe" of installation CD-ROM.
Refer to"\SentinelDriver\Manual\Sentinel System Driver ReadMe.pdf" for the details of
installation..
• Be sure to install the driver.
NOTE • When installing the driver, be sure to login in administrator mode in order to add files to
system folder and input information in registry.
• If a key is connected to personal computer before installing the driver,the message concerning the driver is displayed. In this case, and detach the key from personal computer
and then install the driver.
If a key is connected to personal computer before installing the driver under Windows 95/
98/NT4.0/2000/XP environment, Windows wizard ([Add New Hardware] Wizard) starts
up. In this case, push [cancel], and detach the key from personal computer and then
install the driver.
• When installing the driver under Windows NT4.0, 2000 environment, please install the
driver located in the folder "\SentinelDriver\SSD5411\SSD5411-32bit.EXE" of installation CD-ROM.
For the driver installation procedure, please consult the installation manuarl "\SentinelDriver\SSD5411\Manual\us\Readme.pdf".
Refer to " 12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions " for other countermeasures concerning hardware key.
HW0483092
1.5 Installing MotoSim EG
1.5
Installing MotoSim EG
1. It is strongly recommended that you exit all applications before running the setup program.
NOTE Be sure to login in administrator mode when installing the MotoSim EG, or else the system
related DLL files in Windows might not be updated.
2. Insert the installation DVD into the DVD drive. When the [User Account Control] dialog
appears automatically, click [Yes]. [MotoSim EG - InstallShield Wizard] will be displayed.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
If the following message appears during the installation, press [Yes] to continue installa-
NOTE tion.
This message is displayed when the installation of redistribution package of Visual C ++
2012 has been executed but installation is required.
If this message is displayed, run manually
\ISSetupPrerequisites\{BF2F04CD-3D1F-444e-8960-D08EBD285C3F}\vcredist_x86.exe
after installing MotoSim EG, and install or repair the redistribution package of Visual C ++
2012.
4. When the setup is completed, {MotoSim EG} is registered under the {MotoSim EG}
folder that appears by clicking the [Start] button in the task bar and selecting {Program}
and then {Motoman}. (In the case of Windows10, all menu appears directly under
[Motoman].)
5. Connect the hardware key to the printer port.
For details, refer to " 1.4 Hardware Key " in this chapter.
HW0483092
1.6 Definition of Terms
1.6
Definition of Terms
Cell (*.cel)
A file in which MotoSim EG simulation environmental data are
recorded.
Folder information to store the operation contents, model file
information such as robots, workpieces or tools, data of operational environment layout, etc. is recorded.
Model file (*.mdl)
A file in which geometric data of robots, workpieces or tools are
recorded.
Parameter data, tool data
Information necessary to run a simulation.
It is preferable to use the actual robot data. However, if unavailable, the default data provided by MotoSim EG may be used.
Parent model
Each model requires a coordinate that refers to something in the
layout. Model to which the coordinate of a model refers to is
called "parent model".
The most basic reference model in the MotoSim EG is "world".
Normally, world becomes parent for workpiece models or robot
models.
However, since tool models or positioners move along with external axis or robot axes, they refer to different parent models than
fixed model. Since tool models must move with the robot, the
robot model flange is normally set as the parent model of the tool
model.
HW0483092
1.7 Folder Configuration
1.7
Folder Configuration
¥
Users
Public
Documents
MOTOMAN
MotoSim EG
Simulation environment used
for TEST cell is constructed in
this directory.
CELLS
TEST
MODELS
Stores model files of floor,
tool or workpiece, etc.
Stores parameters, tool
data, jobs for robot.
HP6
Cell file.
TEST.CEL
Stores sample cell files.
EXAMPLE
Program Files
MOTOMAN
MotoSim EG
DEVICE
MODELS
ROBOTS
Stores parameters and conveyor model
files required to operate conveyor.
Stores basic model files such as BOX
and PIPE models of parts.
Stores files related to robot model by
controller types.
Files required to operate MotoSim EG
such as execution files, etc.
The above diagram is based on the assumption that the cell "TEST" is the file in which the
simulation environmental data is stored, and that there is a robot named "HP6".
The model files other than the robot model files are stored in the folder "TEST\MODELS".
HW0483092
2.1 Overview
2 MotoSim EG Quick Tour
This chapter describes the basic operation of MotoSim EG by giving practical examples to first
time users of this system.
Read this chapter thoroughly in order to quickly take advantage of the excellent operability
and various functions of MotoSim EG.
2.1
Overview
This chapter describes the procedures from cell construction to job creation. An arc welding
application is used as an example to illustrate the creation of workpieces for fillet-welding and
a welding torch for tool, and then to teach a welding path.
The following sections aim to create a robot, a workpiece and a stand like the ones prepared
in "Arc_samp_NX" sample cell shown in the figure below.
HW0483092
2.2 Cell Construction
2.2
Cell Construction
1. Click on [START] in the task bar menu, then click {PROGRAM} - {Motoman} - {MotoSim EG} - {MotoSim EG} (In the case of Windows10, {Motoman} - {MotoSim EG}) to
run MotoSim EG.
2. When the main window appears, Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the
[New] menu.
Select here
3. When the New Cel dialog box appears, enter any cell name: a folder where cells,
parameter data, model data, job data, etc. are stored can also be set. (The new folder
name is the same as the cell name.) In this example, the "CelTest" cell is created in
the "CELLS" folder in the "Cells" folder.
Enter "CelTest" in the File name edit box and click the [OK] button.
4. The new cell with only a floor model appears.
Register a controller in the cell by selecting the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group,
click the [New] button.
HW0483092
2.2 Cell Construction
5. In file selection screen, select the folder where the robot parameter data, tool data, etc.
are stored: select "Hp6-a00-MDL" folder from "\ROBOTS\NX100\HP-Family" folders.
Verify that "All.prm" is listed in the file name list box of the "Hp6-a00-MDL" folder; select
the "All.prm" parameter file and click the [Open] button.
Verify this file is
in the folder.
6. Specifying the parameter file displays the “Install Robot” dialog box as shown below.
Enter any robot name in the Robot Name input box. (Here in this example, "HP6" is
entered.)
Since the robot model is usually in the same folder where its corresponding parameter
file is stored, the robot model selection is automatically made with its name displayed
in the Robot Name input box when the parameter file is specified.
However, if the MotoSim EG folder composition has been changed or the robot model
file has been deleted, the robot model file is not selected automatically. In this case,
click the [Model] button to open the File Selecting Screen, then select the robot model:
in this example here, "HP6-a00-MDL.mdl" file is selected. Verify that data for all the
items is entered and click the [OK] button to complete robot registration.
Enter the robot name.
Select robot model with this
button if the robot model file
is not selected automatically.
HW0483092
2.2 Cell Construction
7. When the robot registration has been completed normally, the robot model appears in
the cell screen as shown in the figure below.
However, as shown in the following figure, the robot may be displayed as if it is sank in
the floor. This is because the offset value of the robot operational origin and the floor
center coordinate has been set to 0 (initial value). In this case, correct the robot position by following steps 8 and 9, or copy the actual robot parameter with correct offset
values to the robot model storing folder (for example here, "CelTest\Hp6" folder).
HW0483092
2.2 Cell Construction
8. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] buton, display the Cad
Tree selection box. Select “HP6” and click on [Pos] button.
9. In the Position dialog box below, the robot model can be moved to any arbitrary place.
In the case of HP6, the height from the floor to the robot operational origin is 450 mm,
enter "450" for "Z" and click the [OK] button.
The height from the floor to the robot operational origin (here the height is 450 mm) can be
NOTE obtained by measuring the distance between the floor and the robot bottom by clicking the
button or selecting {Screen} - {Measure} - {Distance}. Refer to " 5.1 MotoSim EG
Display " for the details of measuring tools, and " 12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG " for each robot offset values.
Distance between floor
and robot bottom face.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
2.3
Creation of Models
This section explains how to create workpiece models and tool models using the CAD functions.
2.3.1
Creating a Workpiece and a Workpiece Stand
Follow the flowchart below to create a workpiece and its stand.
Start
Create workpiece stand model
file in Cad Tree.
Add BOX model in file data
editing dialog box.
Set model size and position
in BOX Edit dialog box.
Create workpiece model file
in Cad Tree.
Add parts in the file data
editing dialog box.
Set sizes and positions of
parts in BOX Edit dialog box.
End
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
1. The dimensions of the workpiece model and workpiece stand model are shown in the
following figure:
600
600
400
Workpiece Stand Model
500
25
200
200
30
Units: mm
Workpiece Model
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [CadTree] dialog appears.
3. When the Cad Tree appears, select "world" from the model tree; select {New Model} in
the {File} menu, or click the [Add] button.
Click this botton.
NOTE To create a new model in the model selection screen, verify that the cursor is pointed to
"world" so that it will be the parent model.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
4. Enter "DAI" (a word for “stand” in Japanese) in the Add Model Dialog box and click the
[OK] button.
A confirmation dialog box appears, to create the new model: click on [OK].
5. The "DAI" model appears in the Cad Tree: point the cursor to "DAI" and double-click it.
"DAI" is added here.
6. The file data editing dialog box appears: select “BOX” from the "Add Parts" combo box,
and click [Add].
Click this button.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
7. The BOX Edit dialog box appears: input the dimensions of the workpiece stand.
When a part is added with the [Add] button, the parts editing dialog box appears automati-
NOTE cally. However, to reedit a part that has already been added, use the [Edit] button to display the part editing dialog box after selecting the subject part name.
Select 400 for width, 600 for depth and 600 for height by using the spin button
at
the side of the edit box or by entering the values directly. The incremental values of
the spin box can be changed from 0.1 to 100 in the incremental value list box. Select
desired colors, and check if the stand is displayed properly.
When satisfied, click the [OK] button to return to the file data editing box. Click the
[Close] button in the file data editing dialog box to complete the creation of workpiece
stand model.
8. The workpiece stand model is located at the center of the floor under the current conditions: therefore, click the [Pos] button in the Cad Tree to display the position dialog box,
and input 1000 for X, 0 for Y and 300 for Z to modify the model location.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
9. To create a workpiece, set "DAI" as the parent model by pointing the cursor to "DAI" in
the Cad Tree. Create a new model named "WORK" as shown in the figures below.
10. Display the BOX Edit dialog box by selecting "BOX" from the "Add Parts" combo box in
the file data editing dialog box, then click [Add].
11. Set the workpiece size and position as shown in the table below in the BOX Edit dialog
box: this model will be the bottom part of the fillet-welding workpiece.
Width (W)
200
Depth (D)
500
Height (H)
30
X (mm)
0
Y (mm)
0
Z (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Rz (degree)
0
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
12. The model is currently displayed in the center of DAI model: to modify its position, first
close the BOX Edit dialog box by clicking [OK] and the file data editing dialog box by
clicking [Close]; after closing those dialog boxes, click the [Pos] button in Cad Tree to
display the Position dialog box, and enter 0 for X, 0 for Y, and 315 for Z to display
WORK model on top of DAI model.
Place WORK
model on top of
DAI model.
13. Create the upper part of the workpiece: the upper workpiece is composed of a second
BOX part. Double-click "WORK" in Cad Tree to call up the file data editing dialog box,
and add another BOX model (note that this operation should not be done by clicking
the [Add] button in the Cad Tree).
14. Set the workpiece size and position as shown in the table below in the BOX Edit dialog
box.
Width (W)
25
Depth (D)
X (mm)
0
Y (mm)
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
500
Height (H)
200
0
Z (mm)
115
0
Rz (degree)
0
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
15. Check if the workpiece model has been created according to the dimensions specified
in the step 1.
If the model has different dimensions or to change the color of the model, proceed to
the step 16 and 17 to make modifications.
16. Display the BOX Edit dialog box by pointing the cursor to BOX model to be edited
among the models added to the Cad Tree, then double-click it.
17. Reedit the workpiece size, etc. in the BOX Edit dialog box. To modify the color of the
model, click on the [Color...] button.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
2.3.2
Editing Tool Data
This section explains on how to edit the tool data. The tool to be created is a torch for arcwelding. The tool dimensions are: 0 mm for X, 0 mm for Y, and 395 mm for Z.
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Tool Data] button, the [Tool
Editor] dialog appears.
2. The TOOL Editor dialog box appears: select the tool number to be edited from the
combo box, and set each coordinate value. In this example, the values should be set
as follows since the tool end curves by “Ry = -35” relative to the flange axis.
Select the tool number
to be edited.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
2.3.3
Adding a Tool Model
There are two ways to add a tool model:
(1) Read a tool model in the HSF format (*.hsf).
(2) Create a tool model with the CAD function of MotoSim EG.
In method (1), an HSF format model is used; this is explained in " Reading the HSF Format
Model " later on. First, as a reference, method (2) explains the creation of a tool model with
the MotoSim EG CAD function.

Creating and Adding a Tool Model with the CAD Function
Follow the flowchart below to create a tool model.
Part A
Start
Create a tool model file in
Cad Tree.
Part B
Add parts in the file data
editing dialog box.
Set parts size and layout in
BOX Edit dialog box.
Click on [Close] button in
the file data editing dialog
box after verification.
Part C
Part D
End
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
1. Display the Cad Tree to create a new model names "TOOL". In this case, point the
cursor to "HP6_flange" and create a new model so that the parent model of the tool
model is the flange of the robot.
Select “HP6_flange” and
click on [Add].
If the parent model is not set correctly, change the parent model by selecting {Model
Attribute} - {Set Parent} as shown in the following figure.
Select the parent model
in this dialog box.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
2. The dimensions of the tool model are shown in the following figure:
150
70
70
X
Y
80
Z
Z
20
170
145
35°
30
X
Units: mm
Y
3. Double-click "TOOL" in the Cad Tree to display the file data editing dialog box, and add
parts in the file data editing dialog box.
The tool model is composed of two BOX models and two CYLINDER models. Assume
these four parts as parts A, B, C and D, respectively: edit parts A and B in the BOX edit
dialog box and parts C and D in the CYLINDER Edit dialog box.
The following tables show the size and layout of each parts A, B, C and D.
• Part A (BOX)
Width (W)
70
Depth (D)
70
Height (H)
80
X (mm)
0
Y (mm)
0
Z (mm)
40
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Rz (degree)
0
• Part B (BOX)
Width (W)
150
Depth (D)
70
Height (H)
20
X (mm)
40
Y (mm)
0
Z (mm)
90
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Rz (degree)
0
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
• Part C (CYLINDER)
Lower Dia.
30
Height (mm) 170
Division
16
X (mm)
80
Y (mm)
0
Z (mm)
100
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Rz (degree)
0
Upper Dia.
30
Upper Dia.
30
• Part D (CYLINDER)
Lower Dia.
30
Height (mm) 145
Division
16
X (mm)
80
Y (mm)
Z (mm)
270
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
-35
Rz (degree)
0
4. When the parts are all added, check the tool model on the screen, then click on the
[Close] button to exit the file data editing dialog box.
5. Verify that the size and layout of the tool model, DAI model and WORK model are properly set, and click the [Close] button in the Cad Tree to complete creation of the models.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models

Reading the HSF Format Model
This section describes how to add a tool model which is provided as an HSF format (*.hsf).
If the tool model has been already added in the previous section " Creating and Adding a Tool
Model with the CAD Function ", select "TOOL" from the Cad Tree and select "Hide" to hide it.
1. Select "HP6_tcp" in Cad Tree and click [Add] to display the Add Model Dialog dialog
box, then enter "TOOL2" in the Name edit box.
HW0483092
2.3 Creation of Models
2. Click the [...] button of the file name and select "Torch.hsf" file in the folder "MODELS";
click the [OK] button.
Select this file.
Select this file type.
The HSF model files can be added by drag and drop from the Explorer. (Refer to" 9.11
NOTE Reading a Model " for details.) In this case, answer "Yes" when prompt "Select the parent
model? and then select "HP6_tcp" as the parent.
HW0483092
2.4 Setting of Target Points (AXIS6 Model)
2.4
Setting of Target Points (AXIS6 Model)
This section explains on how to add an AXIS6 model before starting to teach. This procedure
is not necessarily required, however, it makes future teaching easier.
AXIS6 is a model composed of only X, Y and Z-axis frames. Set AXIS6 as target points for
the following two steps which will be teach later.
• Step 3: welding start position
• Step 4: welding end position
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button to display OLP dialog as shown below. Select the [Teacher] radio button in the "Operation Object" section, check the [OLP Pick] check box.
Select “OLP Pick”.
Select “Teacher”.
2. Set the Teacher to the welding start position of Step 3: click the welding start position
HW0483092
2.4 Setting of Target Points (AXIS6 Model)
with [OLP Pick] checked.
Click here.
3. Set the Teacher to optimum angle for the tool welding position: in the following example, welding is performed at an angle of 45° to the welding position. Select "Teacher"
from the Cad Tree and set Rx, Ry and Rz as shown below using the [Pos] button.
Rx (degree)
180
Ry (degree)
45
Rz (degree)
0
4. Double-click the "WORK" model in the Cad Tree and add AXIS6 in the file editing dialog box.
5. Click on [Add] and verify that the number “1” has been added to the Index list box.
Then, check the [Pose] check box in the Teacher group and click the [Goto] button.
With this operation, the teacher frame color in the cell window changes, which means
that AXIS6 has been set to the teacher coordinate and orientation and now overlaps it.
6. Set AXIS6 to the welding end point by performing steps 1 and 2 again, however, since
the welding end point is to be set this time, be sure to click the part shown below in the
HW0483092
2.4 Setting of Target Points (AXIS6 Model)
OLP function. (Since the teacher angle has already been modified in the 3rd step, the
angle modification is not necessary here.)
Click here.
7. Add frame number 2 by clicking the [Insert] button in Frame Edit dialog box for AXIS6
which has been previously set; verify that the [Pose] check box is checked and click on
[Goto].
8. When AXIS6 is set, click on [OK] to complete the setting.
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
2.5
Teaching
Follow the flowchart below to create an actual job for arc-welding.
Start
Select a job.
Step1: Set in the standby
position.
Step2: Determine the welding
approach posture.
Step 3: Move to welding start
position.
Step 4: Determine welding
end position.
Step 5: Move to the position
where the robot does
not interfere with
workpiece.
Step 6: Return to the standby
position.
Verify each step.
End
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
2.5.1
Selecting a Job
Select a job before teaching: On the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job] button to display Select Job dialog box.
In this example, create a new job "guide.jbi": enter "Guide" in the edit box and click on [OK].
Enter a new job name.
2.5.2
Teaching the Standby Position
1. On the [Robot] tab, in the [VPP] group, click the [Show] button to display the programming pendant dialog box.
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
2. Teach the standby position: move the robot to the standby position using the spin button
.
3. Click the [Move...] button to display the Interpolation dialog box.
Select the motion type, speed and position level from combo boxes and click on [OK]
to determine the settings. Here, the motion type and speed are set to MOVJ (link) and
100%, respectively.
MOVJ
100%
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
4. Select [Add] among the radio buttons [Del], [Add] and [Modify], and click on [Enter] as
shown in the following figure to complete the teaching of standby position (Step 1).
STEP1
Select “Add”.
2.5.3
Determining the Welding Approach Posture
Use the spin button
to posture the robot so that it can perform welding.
Click the [Enter] button to register this step (Step 2).
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
2.5.4
Teaching the Welding Start Position
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button to display OLP dialog box.
2. Select the [OLP Pick] check box and [Vertex] check box in the “Pick type” section, and
click an arbitrary point; the TCP moves to overlap the vertex near the clicked point.
To make the most of the AXIS6 which has been set to the welding start point in the previous section, the OLP settings should be made as follows:
• OLP Active:
Checked
• Move Mode:
Position, Orientation
• Pick Mode:
Vertex
• Pick Object:
Frames
• Operation Obectj: Robot TCP
3. Click on AXIS6 displayed on the screen with the mouse as shown in the figure below:
the tool angle is adjusted to the angle of the AXIS6.
If the tool collides with the workpiece due to an improper tool angle, avoid the collision
by manually repositioning the robot with the programming pendant dialog box.
Click around here.
4. Click the [Move...] button to display the Interpolation dialog box.
Set MOVJ (link) for the motion type and 25% for the speed.
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
5. Click the [Enter] button to register this step (Step 3).
STEP2
STEP3
MOVJ
25%
2.5.5
Teaching the Welding End Position
1. Enable the OLP function and click on AXIS6 which has been set to the welding end
point to move the tool to the welding end point.
Click around here.
2. Click the [Move...] button to display Interpolation dialog box.
Set MOVL (linear interpolation) for the motion type and 93 mm/s for the speed.
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
3. Click the [Enter] button to register this step (Step 4).
STEP4
MOVL
93 mm/s
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
2.5.6
Teaching the Torch Retraction
1. Use the spin button
of the programming pendant dialog box to move the robot
where it does not interfere with the workpiece.
2. Click the [Move...] button to display the Interpolation dialog box.
Set MOVJ (link) for the motion type and 50% for the speed.
3. Click the [Enter] button to register this step (Step 5).
STEP5
MOVJ
50%
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
2.5.7
Returning to the Standby Position
1. To move the robot to the same position as Step 1, check the step synchronization
[Sync] check box in the programming pendant dialog box, then point the cursor to the
instruction of Step 1 in the job display section.
Select Step1 and
move the robot to
the standby position.
2. Click the [Move...] button to display Interpolation dialog box.
Set MOVJ (link) for the motion type and 100% for the speed.
3. Clear the check box for the step synchronization [Sync], and point the cursor to Step 5.
Remove this check.
Clicking Step5 does
not move the robot.
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
4. Click the [Enter] button to register this step (Step 6).
STEP6
MOVJ
100%
2.5.8
Verifying Each Step
Check the step synchronization [Sync] check box in the programming pendant dialog box, and
point the cursor to each Step in the edit box instruction display section to verify the movement
of the robot Step by Step.
Select [Sync] check
box here to verify the
robot movement.
HW0483092
2.5 Teaching
2.5.9
Editing a JOB
A JOB can be edited with the following procedure.

Modifying Steps
1) Click [Move...] button to modify the interpolation settings, and check the [Allow
Modif.] check box.
2) Point the cursor to the step to be changed. Select the [Modify] radio button, then
click the [Enter] button.

Modifying or Adding Instructions
1) Point the cursor to the step to be modified or added in the job display section of
the programming pendant dialog box, and double-click the step.
2) The JOB Edit dialog box appears; enter the instruction in the edit box and select
either the [Replace Line] or [Add Line] button.

Deleting Instructions
Point the cursor to the step to be deleted; select the [Del] radio button and click the
[Enter] button.
HW0483092
2.6 Playback
2.6
Playback
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Reset] button.
2. On the [Controller] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Start] button to perform playback and check the movement.
3. When the playback is completed, the moving time and play time are displayed in the
Cycle Time dialog box. Click the [OK] button to close it.
HW0483092
3.1 Operation Flow
3 Offline Teaching Procedure
This chapter describes the procedure for offline teaching and examination of robot application
with MotoSim EG, and other related software.
3.1
Operation Flow
The following flowchart shows the general flow of the offline teaching using MotoSim EG.
Start
Work cell construction
Registration and arrangement
of a robot
Creation of work model and
teaching target points
Model arrangement
Construct MotoSim EG operational environment (cell) on
the personal computer.
Select a robot to be used and determine its position.
Create models by using MotoSim EG.
Set target points to simplify teaching.
Examine the layout.
Teaching of robot motion
Perform teaching and playback by using MotoSim EG to
examine the motion.
Review of robot motion,
time, and interference
Correction (work calibration)
JOB data transfer to
controller
Verification/correction of
motion using actual robot
Correct the layout error between MotoSim EG and
actual manipulator.
Send/receive data and transfer job data through
CompactFlash or a separate transmission software.
Reduce the error between MotoSim EG data and actual
robot using the calibration software, and verify and correct
the motion.
End
Solid lines indicate operation by MotoSim EG and dotted lines indicate operations by other
software.
HW0483092
4.1 Creating a New Cell
4 Creating and Editing a Cell
This chapter explains on how to create and edit a cell: before performing an operation with
MotoSim EG, create a cell and set the type and number of the robot to be used.
For robot registration, refer to " 7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot ".
4.1
Creating a New Cell
Procedure
1. Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [New] menu.
2. Enter a file name in the File name edit box, and click on [Open] to create a basic cell.
Enter a file name here.
HW0483092
4.2 Opening a Cell
4.2
Opening a Cell
Procedure
1. Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Open] - [Open] menu.
When the sample cell is opened, click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the
[Open] - [Open Sample Cell] menu.
2. Select a cell file, and click on [Open]: the cell appears.
When opening a cell with LINE data (wire frame), it is recommended to use LINE data in
NOTE the HMF format: opening a cell with LINE data in other format may take some time.
If the LINE data is in the format other than HMF, convert the LINE data with “MDL2HMF.EXE”
(located in a folder where MotoSim EG has been installed).
If there is a model in the RWX format in the cell, the following dialog box appears.
Click on [OK] to open the cell: the cell opens after the model in RWX format is automatically
converted to HMF format.
NOTE
• When the model is converted, a cell with corresponding HMF format will automatically be
created as well: the RWX format cell will be saved under the name "*.cel.BCL".
• If the cell created upon the model conversion is not saved, the model will be converted
again the next time the cell is open.
HW0483092
4.3 Storing a Cell
4.3
Storing a Cell
A cell file can be stored either under it current name “Save” or under a new name “Save As”.
Newer cell files containing HSF files may not display properly on older MotoSimEG ver-
NOTE sions. In a cell file need to be used with an older MotoSimEG version, it is recommended
to save it in the corresponding version with the "Save As" dialog box.
4.3.1
Save
To store a file under its current name, click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the
[Save] menu.
If the cell file was loaded from an older MotoSimEG version, the following message will display to confirm if the cell should be saved in cell original format or in the MotoSimEG current
version.
Click [Yes] to save the file in MotoSimEG current version. Click [No] to save the file in its original version. Click [Cancel] to abort saving the cell file.
HW0483092
4.4 Exiting a Cell and MotoSim EG
4.3.2
Save As
To store a file under a new name, click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Save
As] menu. Then store the file with the desired cell.name. By changing the "Save as type"
selection, the cell file may also be saved in a previous MotoSimEG format.
4.4
Exiting a Cell and MotoSim EG
To exit MotoSim EG, click the MotoSim EG button (
They can also be terminated by clicking
),and select the [Exit] menu.
button in the control menu box on each window.
HW0483092
4.5 Creating a Cell with Actual Robot Data
4.5
Creating a Cell with Actual Robot Data
Perform the following operations in order to run a simulation using the jobs taught by an actual
robot and/or parameters of an actual robot with external axis.
Procedure
1. Create a new cell and register the same model robot as the actual robot.
2. Save the cell and close the file.
3. Download the following files from the actual robot, and copy them in the robot folder
under the folder "CELLS":
• Parameter file (File name: ALL.PRM)
• Tool data file (File name: TOOL.COND)
• Job data file (File name: ***.JBI)
• Other data files including user frame data, condition files for other robots, etc.
4. Open the cell file and operate the robot.
HW0483092
4.6 Exporting a File
4.6
Exporting a File
This section explains on how to output the current display of the models in the cell window to
the HTML files. The output file is in 3 dimensions and enables changing of viewpoint, zoom,
etc.
Procedure
1. Determine the display state of the models on the cell window.
2. Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Export file] menu. Select the
export file format in the “Save as type” box and save the file with the desired file name.
NOTE
• When exporting to HTML format, a HTML file and a HSF file are saved. Both files are
required to display the HTML data properly.
• When exporting HSF file format, only the HSF file is saved. A separate application supporting HSF format display will be required to view the HSF file by itself.
• When storing the cell as an HTML file, be sure that the folder name consists of one-byte
characters only; a file with two-byte characters may not be successfully opened.
• To open the cell saved in HTML file, use a personal computer which has access to the
Internet.
• To view the cell saved in HTML file, use a personal computer which has access to the
Internet. When viewing the HTML files of the simulation, an Internet connection is
required to install any necessary ActiveX controls. Allow any ActiveX controls blocked
by Windows security settings.
HW0483092
4.6 Exporting a File
4.6.1
Playback animation file export
Job playback animation of the cell display can be exported to HTML file format.
NOTE The color change of models occurring during playback (such as collision check) will not be
included in the animation file.
Procedure
1. Set the display status of the models in the cell.
2. From the menu select [Setting] - [Options] to display the "Option Setting" dialog. Under
the "Robot Options" tab, in the "Animation Playback" section, check the "Export HSF
file" box.
3. Select the job for which you want to create an animation. Playback the entire job.
4. From the menu select {File} - {Export File} to display the "Save As" dialog box. In the
"Save as type" box select "HTML Page (*.html). Save the file under the desired file
name. (This will also save an HSF file.)
4.6.2
Exported HTML file display operations
Once the exported HTML file is open, the view can be manipulated with the mouse.
• The view can be change by clicking, holding and dragging with the left mouse button. To
set camera manipulation mode, right mouse click on the view and select one of the following mode: Orbit (Rotate), Pan (Shift), Zoom (Zoom), Zoom to Window (Zoom to Extents).
For detail on the camera mode, please refer to section " 5.1 MotoSim EG Display ".
• In the case of HTML animation file, to playback the animation right mouse click and select
Animation - Play. The playback can be paused/resumed by right clicking and selecting
Animation - Pause. The animation can be reset to the beginning by right clicking and
selecting Animation - Rewind.
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
5 Display Operations
MotoSim EG has various display control functions such as expansion, reduction, simultaneous displays from various directions, etc. In addition, by using 3D (three-dimensional) surface
model display, the motion can be easily verified.
5.1
MotoSim EG Display
For improvement of operability, the basic operations of MotoSim EG are common with those
of other Windows applications.
The following figure shows the MotoSim EG main window.
NOTE The appearance of MotoSim EG Ver5.20 differs greatly from Ver4.10 or before. For more
detail, please refer to the " 1.1.1 Difference of the operation from 4.10 " section.
MotoSim EG-VRC button
Quick Access Toolbar
Tab
Title bar
Ribbon
Group
Docking
Cell
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
5.1.1
Ribbon
The ribbon is a command bar that organizes the features of an application into a series of tabs
at the top of the main window. The ribbon replaces the traditional menu bar and toolbars.

MotoSim EG button
Creates a new cell.
For details, refer to section " 4.1 Creating a New Cell " .
Reads an existing cell.
For details, refer to section " 4.2 Opening a Cell ".
Reads an existing sample cell.
For details, refer to section " 4.2 Opening a Cell ".
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
Saves the edited cell information of a cell file.
For details, refer to section " 4.3.1 Save ".
Save the active cell file with a new name.
For details, refer to section " 4.3.2 Save As ".
Outputs the HTML file of the active cell file.
For details, refer to section " 4.6 Exporting a File ".
The help of MotoSim EG is displayed.
Displays the Option dialog box.
For details, refer to section " 10 Configuration Settings ".
To close the active cell.
For details, refer to section " 4.4 Exiting a Cell and MotoSim
EG ".

Home
Edit
Undoes the last operation.
Click the down arrows beside the icon to display the last 9 operations. Selecting an operation from the list will undo this operation and all the operations
performed after.
Redoes the last undone operation.
Click the down arrows beside the icon to display the last 9 undone operations.
Selecting an operation from the list will redo this operation and all the undone
operations performed before.
NOTE
• Undo and Redo function supports the robot position change, model edition, Cad Tree
operations and camera viewpoint operations. Any operation generated by the virtual
pendant or the playback of a JOB is not supported by the Undo and Redo function.
• Undo and Redo function may generate temporary files (mseg????.tmp) located in the
Temp folder under the MotoSimEG installation folder. Deleting these files while MotoSimEG is running may prevent undoing some operations. Normal termination of the
MotoSimEG application will automatically remove all temporary files in this folder.
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
Teaching
Displays the Position Panel.
Position Panel displays the robot position, pulse data, etc.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.1 Position Panel ".
Displays OLP dialog box and enables OLP function. Moves the end of the
robot tool or a model to a target point with one-click operation.
For details, refer to section " 8.3 Teaching ".
View
Displays the View Manager panel, which offers a wider selection of
standard view and allows to save and load up to 10 user defined
views.
For details, refer to section " 6.1.2 [Preset Viewpoint Operation ".
Displays all the models in the cell to fit in the view.
Change the viewpoint to display the default isometric view.
Changes the viewpoint to display the default top view.
Change the viewpoint to display the default side view.
Changes the viewpoint to display the default front view.
Model
Selects a model: click any point of the desired model for selection.
Displays the model “Cad Tree” (tree structure organization of the models),
indicating models display status and relationship. Can be used to add and
edit models.
For details, refer to section " 9.1.1 Outline of the Cad Tree ".
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
Pick
The Pick Mode sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked
area.
For details, refer to section " Pick Mode Setting ".
Pick object set filters on the type of objects that can be selected by the mouse
pick.
For details, refer to section " Pick Object Setting ".
Screen
Toggles display of the AXIS6 in frame indicators in the view.
Displays cross-section X/Y/Z.
For details, refer to section " 6.7 Cutting Planes ".
Creates a memo (text).
For details, refer to section " 6.6 Memo ".
Creates a dimension line.
For details, refer to section " 6.10 Measure Line ".
Draws a free-form line/circle/rectangle or adds a note (text).
For details, refer to section " 6.5 Markup ".
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
The display mode can be change.
For details, refer to section " 6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode ".
Changes the frame line to display the width.
For details, refer to section " 6.12.1 Changing Frame Width ".
Displays the Light Manager panel, which allows to add or remove
lights, and to modify each light's properties.
For details, refer to section " 6.2 Light Manager Operation ".
Shadows can be displayed for the models on the screen.
For details, refer to section " 6.3 Displaying Shadows ".
Displays the axis triad.
For details, refer to the section " 10.1.3 Display ".
Changes the perspective.
For details, refer to the section " 10.1.3 Display ".
Mesurement
Measures the distance between two clicked points.
For details, refer to section " 6.8 Measure Distance ".
Measures the angle between three clicked points.
For details, refer to section " 6.9 Measure Angle ".
Tools
Copy the static image of the cell window.
For details, refer to section " 6.12.2 Copying the Image ".
Drawing performance is measured.
External software is executed.
For details, refer to section " 8.8 Running an External Software ".
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
Settings
The re-drawing interval at the playback is set every second (s).
For details, refer to section " 7.3.2 Refresh Interval ".
Sets the language.
For details, refer to section " 10.4 Language and Unit Settings ".

Robot
Setup
Creates a new robot.
For details, refer to section " Adding a Robot ".
Copies an existing robot.
For details, refer to section " Copying a Robot ".
Deletes an existing robot.
For details, refer to section " Deleting a Robot ".
Job
Selects a job to execute and edit.
For details, refer to section " 7.2.1 Job Management ".
The master job is called, registered and canceled.
For details, refer to section " 7.2.2 Master Job Management ".
Opens the job folder.
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
VPP
Displays the programming pendant dialog box.
For details, refer to section " 8.1.1 Programming Pendant ".
Displays all Virtual Pendants.
Hides all Virtual Pendants.
File Settings
Modify the tool data file.
For details, refer to section " 7.4.1 Tool Data Setting ".
Modify the user frame data.
For details, refer to section " 7.4.2 User Frame Setting ".
Modify robot callbration data file.
For details, refer to section " 7.4.3 Robot Calibration Setting ".
Display/delete the cube interference area.
For details, refer to section " 7.7.1 Displaying the Cube Interference Area ".
Display and modify the safety function.
For details, refer to section " 7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data
of Safety Function ".
Set the soft limit.
For details, refer to section " 7.4.4 Soft Limit Setting ".
Robot
Set the robot model.
For details, refer to section " 7.5.1 Model Setting ".
Draw TCP Reach View.
For details, refer to section " 7.5.2 Reach View ".
HW0483092
5.1 MotoSim EG Display
Set the offset value of the subject robot frame and the warm up
time. For details, refer to section " 7.5.3 Robot Information ".
External Device
Creates a new external device.
For details, refer to section " 7.5 Robot Settings ".
Set the soft limit.
For details, refer to section " 7.6.4 Modifying the Soft Limit of
a Device ".
Displays the Job Panel.
For details, refer to section " 7.6.6 Programming a Device ".
Edit conveyor specification.
For details, refer to section " Conveyor Setting ".
Set the conveyor condition file.
For details, refer to section " 7.6.9 Conveyor Synchronization ".
Display conveyor operation panel.
For details, refer to section " 7.6.8 Conveyor Operation
Panel ".
HW0483092

Simulation
Playback
Jumps to the top of the job execution line. Use this button to execute
(or reset) a job from the beginning when job execution is interrupted.
Executes the job currently selected.
Use
button to select the job to be executed.
Halts temporarily the job under execution.
Use
button to execute the rest of the job.
Interrupts the job under execution.
Enables a job to skip backward step by step.
Enables a job to skip forward step by step.
Display the Stage master.
For details, refer to section " 7.3.3 Stage Master ".
To playback without considering the lag of servo.
Display the Cycle time.
For details, refer to section " 7.3.1 Cycle Time ".
Monitor
Display the Variable Monitor.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.3 Variable Monitor ".
HW0483092
Displays a window which enables monitoring of the [Virtual I/O] signals.
The I/O signals are link to the job I/O instructions execution.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.2 I/O ".
Display the Pulse Record.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.5 Pulse Recorder ".
Display the Lap Time Panel.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.4 Lap Time Panel ".
Display the Step Interval Time Panel.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.6 Step Interval Time Panel ".
Display the Trace Manager.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.7 Trace ".
Collision
Display the Collision Detection.
For details, refer to section " 8.7 Collision Detection ".
I/O Settings
Display the Connection Setting.
For details, refer to section " 8.2.2 I/O ".
Settings
Display the Paint Panel.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.4 Paint Setting ".
HW0483092

Tool
Teaching Assistance
Display Parallel Shift.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.3 Job Shift ".
Display Four Point Teaching.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.5 Four Point Teaching ".
Display Step Motion.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.8 Step Motion ".
Display Tool Renew.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.6 Tool Renew ".
Display Auto Place.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.7 Auto Place ".
Execute Job Editor.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.2 Job Editing Function ".
Create a taught point model (AXIS6 model) for a specified
job. For details, refer to section " 8.4 Create Model from
Job ".
Update the taught positions of a job with the points of a
model (AXIS6 model). For details, refer to section " 8.5
Update Job from Model ".
Export the CAD model (IGES, SAT or HSF format) for
each taught points of a job.
For details, refer to section " 8.6 Export CAD File from Job
".
Teaching Sheet
Create a teaching sheet.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.9 Teaching Sheet ".
HW0483092
Delete a teaching sheet.
Stop creating a teaching sheet.
Set the option of teaching sheet.
For details, refer to section " 8.3.9 Teaching Sheet ".
Online
Use a remote monitor function.
For details, refer to section " 11.12 Remote Monitor Function ".
HW0483092
5.1.2

Mouse Operation Switching Bar
Viewpoint Operation Switching Bar
Click the button, the icon is surrounded with yellow frame and viewpoint operation by right button is changed.
To show the viewpoint operation switching bar, refer to the section " 10.6 Mouse Customization ".
Zoom in and out the image by dragging the mouse upward (to zoom
in) or downward (to zoom out) over the screen; rotate the image centering on the Z-axis of "world" coordinates by dragging the mouse
from side to side.
Drag the mouse over the desired range to be enlarged.
For vertical rotation, drag the mouse up and down; for horizontal rotation, drag the mouse from side to side.
Drag the mouse from side to side and up and down to synchronize the
viewpoint with the mouse motion.
Zoom in and out the image by dragging the mouse upward (to zoom
in) or downward (to zoom out) over the screen; rotate the image horizontally by dragging the mouse from side to side.
Zoom in and out the image by dragging the mouse upward (to zoom
in) or downward (to zoom out) over the screen.
Click any desirable point so that the image is displayed with the
clicked point located in the center of the screen.
HW0483092
6.1 Viewpoint Operation Tools
6 Display Operation
The display tool functions help to achieve better visualization enabling text input on the cell
window, sectional display of models, display mode change, etc.
6.1
Viewpoint Operation Tools
MotoSim EG can control the display with the viewpoint operation tool as follows
6.1.1
Viewpoint Operation with the Mouse
Each viewpoint operation mode is assigned to the button of the mouse.
Drag with the mouse to the up to down or side to side, a viewpoint will change by the viewpoint operation mode currently assigned to the button.
The assignment of the viewpoint operation mode is as follows.
Viewpoint Operation Mode
Mouse Operation
Viewpoint Movement
Parallel
Press-and-hold the scroll
wheel and drag
Drag the mouse from side to side
and up and down to synchronize
the viewpoint with the mouse
motion.
Rotate
Press-and-hold the scroll
wheel and the right button,
and drag
For vertical rotation, drag the
mouse up and down; for horizontal
rotation, drag the mouse from side
to side.
Zoom
Rotate the scroll wheel
Zoom in and out the image by
dragging the mouse upward (to
zoom in) or downward (to zoom
out) over the screen.
Zoom And Rotate
Press-and-hold the right
button and drag
Zoom in and out the image by
dragging the mouse upward (to
zoom in) or downward (to zoom
out) over the screen; rotate the
image centering on the Z-axis of
"world" coordinates by dragging
the mouse from side to side.
Change the viewpoint
Press the scroll wheel
Click any desirable point so that
the image is displayed with the
clicked point located in the center
of the screen.
Free Zoom
Press [CTRL] key + Pressand-hold the right button
and drag
Drag the mouse over the desired
range to be enlarged.
HW0483092
6.1 Viewpoint Operation Tools

Right Mouse Button Operation
A pop-up menu for viewpoint operation appears by clicking the right mouse button on the cell
window.
6.1.2
[Preset Viewpoint Operation
The camera viewpoint can also be changed to a preset viewpoint.
The most communly used viewpoint are available by clicking on the [Home] tab, in the [View]
group
.
For detail on the preset viewpoint choices please refer to section " 5.1.1 Ribbon ".
Further preset viewpoint choices are available with the View Manager.

Viewpoint Operation with the View Manager
The View Manager panel allows to quickly change the view point of the scene by selecting
one of the standard views or user views. And, +90 degree or -90 degree rotation from the current viewpoint can be executed.
The View Manager panel can be displayed by clicking the [Home] tab, in the [View] group, the
[View Manager] button.
HW0483092
6.1 Viewpoint Operation Tools
Standard View
buttons
Enables/disables the
zoom to extents function
when a standard view
button is pressed
+90 deg. or -90
deg. rotation
button
User Views
listbox
View Manager
Item
Description
[Standard View] buttons
Changes the viewpoint to display associated the standard view.
+90 deg. or -90 deg. rotation button
Rotates the viewpoint + 90 degree or -90 degree from the current
viewpoint.
[Fit view to extends] button
Displays all the models in the cell to fit in the view.
[User View] listbox
Double clicking one of the views will display the associated user
defined view.Clicking the selected view name will enable the edition
mode to allow renaming the selected view.
[Load] button
Changes the viewpoint displayed on the screen to the user view
selected in the "User View" listbox.
[Save] button
Saves the current viewpoint displayed on the screen to the user view
selected in the "User View" listbox.
[Close] button
Closes the View Manager panel.
HW0483092
6.1 Viewpoint Operation Tools
NOTE User views definitions are only saved to the file when the cell is saved.

Using Shortcuts
Each view has an associated shortcut key that can be used to recall one of the defined views
when the input focus is on either the cell display or on the View Manager panel. Pressing one
of the numeric keys (1... 9, 0) will load the corresponding user view; the "0" key is used for the
10th user view. The first letter of the standard view name is used (.e.i. "T" for the Top view, "F"
for the Front view...), the letters are indicated on the buttons of the View Manager panel. The
keys "I", "O", "J" and "K" are used for the four isometric views.

Smooth Transition
The viewpoint can be changed with or without smooth transition function by setting the display
as follows:
Smooth transition ON (smooth transition checked in the menu):
• The viewpoint changes as the image continuously moves.
• For the duration setting, click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Options]
menu.
Smooth transition OFF (smooth transition unchecked in the menu):
• The viewpoint changes instantaneously.
HW0483092
6.2 Light Manager Operation
6.2
Light Manager Operation
The Light Manager panel allows to add or remove lights and to modify the settings or each
light. In addition to the default light, up to 4 additional lights can be added.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Light Manager] button, the [Light Manager]
dialog appears.
Light intensity adjustment.
Pressing the [Shift] key
enables or disables the
Pick Light Position with
Mouse function.
Selects the light to be
modified.
Set the properties of the
selected light. Note that only
the color can be changed for
the “Default” light.
Light Manager
Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of the lights.
Sliding the control toward the left will reduce the general lighting of the
scene.
Sliding the control toward the right will increase it.
(The standard intensity is 100)
All the lights are affected by this control.
Light No.
Selects a light for operations.
The properties of the currently selected light are displayed in the Light
Property section.
HW0483092
6.2 Light Manager Operation
Light Manager
Add
Adds a new light.
To complete the operation, click on the main view to position the light.
A light object will be displayed to indicate the location of the light. Up
to 4 lights can be added. For more details please refer to the " Adding
and Modifying Lights " and " Light Sources " sections.
Remove
Deletes the currently selected light.
Note that the "Default" light cannot be deleted.
Pick Light Position with
Mouse
When checked, clicking on the main view will move the position of the
light to the clicked position. (When unchecked, clicking the main view
doesn't change the light position and allows view point change operation.)
Pressing the [Shift] key toggles the Pick Light Position with Mouse
check mark.
Light Property
[On / Off]
[Off] : The selected light is turned off. But, the light is not erased, the
settings remains valid.
[On] : The selected light is turned on.
[Type]
Distant Light : Light rays are all parallel (coming from an infinite dis
tance)
Local Light : Omni directional rays coming from the light source
point (light marker).
Spot Light : Cone shaped directional rays coming from the light
source point (light marker).
For more detail, please refer to the " Light Sources " section.
[Color]
The color of the light is displayed in the rectangle.
[Change]
Displays the Color Dialog to change the color of the light.
OK
Closes the Light Manager panel.The lights information will be save to
the cell file when the cell is saved.
The light markers in the main view will disappear when Light Manager
is closed. To display the light markers again, reopen the Light Manager panel.
Cancel
Cancels the light setting modifications and closes the Light Manager
panel.
The light markers in the main view will be deleted.
NOTE
• To preserve the light settings for next time the cell is opened, the cell needs to be saved
after the light settings are changed.
• When exporting files (i.e. html format), changing the light settings don't affect the resulting exported file.
HW0483092
6.2 Light Manager Operation

Adding and Modifying Lights
Operation Procedure
1. Press the [Add] button. The properties of the newly added light will display in the Light
Property section. (At this stage, the light source still isn't created.)
2. Click on the main view to position the light. The light will be created and a light marker will
be displayed to indicate the location of the light.
The light location and type can be confirmed by looking at the light marker in the main
view.
Light Marker
HW0483092
6.2 Light Manager Operation
The lighting of the cell will change to reflect the new light influence.
As long as the [Pick Light Position with Mouse] is checked, clicking on the main view will move the
light to the clicked position. Other items can be changed in the Light Property section.
Note that a maximum of 4 lights can be added to the cell.
3. To modify existing light, first select the "Light No." and then change the settings in the
"Light Property" section.
4. Press [OK] or [Cancel] to close the Light Manager panel.
When the Light Manager is closed the light markers in the main view will disappear. To
display the light markers again, reopen the Light Manager panel.
NOTE To preserve the light settings for next time the cell is opened, the cell needs to be saved
after the light settings are changed.

Deleting Lights
Select the light number. Press the [Remove] button to remove the light.
Note that the "Default" light cannot be deleted.
HW0483092
6.2 Light Manager Operation

Light Sources
Default
Directional light constantly attached to the viewpoint. The initial light color is white.
Result after changing the
light color
The FLOOR model is not affected
by light change and will always
display the same way.
HW0483092
6.2 Light Manager Operation
The light reflection and intensity of the whole scene can be modified by adjusting the "Intensity" value.
Intensity:
100
75
50
Distant Light
Light is emitted from a infinite distance so that all
the rays are parallel.Light type for general use.
The light direction is from the clicked position
toward the viewpoint center.
Distant Light Marker
(Located at the clicked position)
HW0483092
6.2 Light Manager Operation
Local Light
Light is emitted in all direction from the light position.
Useful for generating light from a given point.
Local Light Marker
(Located at the clicked position)
Spot Light
Light is emitted in a specific direction forming a cone from the light position in
a cone shape. Useful to illuminate a specific face of a part.
The light direction is from the clicked position toward the viewpoint center.
For proper illumination of a model or a face, it may be necessary to relocate
the viewpoint center on the intended target before setting the light position.
Viewpoint center can be moved with the
the {Screen} - {Camera Scope} menu.
icon or the {Center} item from
Spot Light Marker
(Located at the clicked position)
HW0483092
6.3 Displaying Shadows
6.3
Displaying Shadows
Shadows can be displayed for the models on the screen.
Since the shadows are not easily visible when the floor is displayed, use the shadow with the
opacity of floor image decreased (approx. to 0.5 or less), or hide the floor image.
For the detailed setting of shadow, refer to " 10.1.4 Shadow ".
6.4
Pick Settings
The Pick settings influence the selection of objects when picking object in the cell view with
the mouse.

Pick Mode Setting
The Pick Mode sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked area.
Procedure
On the [Home] tab, in the [Pick] group, click the [Pick Mode] button, and select one of the following items.
• Free:
Selects the point of the model corresponding to the clicked position.
• Vertex:
Selects the model vertex nearest to the clicked position.
• Center:
Selects the face or edge center nearest to the clicked position. Note that
in order to select the center of the cylindrical model, select the model using
[Vertex] instead of [Center].
HW0483092
6.4 Pick Settings
• Edge
Selects the edge point nearest to the clicked position.
NOTE That these settings are also linked to the same settings available in the OLP dialog.

Pick Object Setting
Pick object set filters on the type of objects that can be selected by the mouse pick.
Procedure
On the [Home] tab, in the [Pick] group, click the [Selectable Object] button, and select one of
the following items.
• Models:
Solid models.
• Frames:
Model frame or AXIS6 models. (Note: The model frame needs to be visible
to be selected.)
• Lines &
lnters:
Lines such as LINE part, WORK line and wireframe model, and intersection lines generated by the intersection of parts or models.
(Note the intersection lines are displayed during the pick operation when
the left mouse button is pressed down. In cells with many detailed models,
the intersection generation may slow down the pick function response. In
such case, you may uncheck this item to improve performance.)
• Points:
Points such as TRACE points.
• Floor:
FLOOR parts. (Note: FLOOR parts tend to interfere selection depending
on the viewpoint, therefore their selection is managed independently from
other models.)
NOTE That these settings are also linked to the same settings available in the OLP dialog.

Pick method and screen display
When the mouse pointer is over the cell view, press down the left mouse button. The model
considered for selection will display in yellow with a red dot to indicate the specific point location. The display will update to represent change of selection as the mouse pointer is moved
HW0483092
6.4 Pick Settings
over different models. The actual selection is made only when the mouse button is released.
Picked point
HW0483092
6.5 Markup
6.5
Markup
Graphic forms (such as circles, rectangles) and text can be temporarily drawn on the cell window.
6.5.1
Freehand
This section explains on how to draw a free-form line.
NOTE The line drawn on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the line will be
deleted when the viewpoint is changed.)
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Make-up] button, and select [Free
Hand].
Position the mouse pointer at a desired point, and drag the mouse freely so that the
mouse pointer on screen draws a line with the mouse movement.
Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Options] menu to set the color
HW0483092
6.5 Markup
and thickness of the line. Refer to " 10.2 Markup Settings " for details.
6.5.2
Circle
This section explains on how to draw a circle.
NOTE The circle drawn on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the circle will be
deleted when the viewpoint is changed.)
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Make-up] button, and select [Circle].
Position the mouse pointer at a desired point, and drag the mouse: a circle is drawn
centering around the point where the mouse started dragging.
Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Options] menu to set the color
and line thickness of the circle. Refer to " 10.2 Markup Settings " for details.
HW0483092
6.5 Markup
6.5.3
Rectangle
This section explains on how to draw a rectangle.
NOTE The rectangle drawn on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the rectangle will
be deleted when the viewpoint is changed.)
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Make-up] button, and select [Rectangle].
Position the mouse pointer at a desired point, and drag the mouse: a rectangle is
drawn from the point where the mouse started dragging.
Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Options] menu to set the color
and line thickness of the rectangle. Refer to " 10.2 Markup Settings " for details.
HW0483092
6.5 Markup
6.5.4
Notes
This section explains on how to add a note.
NOTE The note added on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.

Adding a Note
Procedure
1. Set the viewpoint of the window. (This step must be done first since the note will be
deleted when the viewpoint is changed.)
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Make-up] button, and select
[Notes].
Click any point on the window where to add notes; a "Note" indication appears at the
clicked point. Right-click the “Note” to open a pop-up menu, and select {Edit} to enter
texts.
3. Click on [OK] after entering the texts.
HW0483092
6.5 Markup
Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Options] menu to set the font and
color of the text. Refer to " 10.2 Markup Settings " for details.
NOTE • The note added on the cell is deleted by changing the viewpoint of the window.
• When adding two-byte characters, use a font that properly displays two-byte characters.

Deleting a Note
Select the note to be deleted, and right-click it. Select {Delete} from the pop-up menu to
delete the text.

Relocating a Note
Drag a note to a different location with on the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Make-up] button, and selected [Notes].
Note that the arrow remains at the same point.
HW0483092
6.6 Memo
6.6
Memo
This section explains on how to create a memo (text).
Memo

Creating a Memo
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Memo] button.
Click the desired model and drag the mouse to the desired memo location; a "Memo"
indication with an arrowed line appears at the position where the mouse button is
released after dragging.
Non-displayed model or the point where there is no model cannot be selected as a subject
NOTE for the memo indication whereas any point of the model displayed on the window can be
selected for the memo indication.
2. Right-click “Memo” to open a pop-up menu, and select {Edit} to enter texts.
3. Enter texts, and click on [OK].
Click the MotoSim EG button (
), and select the [Options] menu to set the font and
HW0483092
6.6 Memo
color of the texts. Refer to " 10.2 Markup Settings " for details.
NOTE When adding two-byte characters, use a font that properly displays two-byte characters.

Deleting a Memo
Select a memo to be deleted, and right-click it. Select {Delete} from the pop-up menu to
delete the memo with the arrowed line.

Relocating a Memo
Drag a note to a different location with on the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Make-up] button, and selected [Memo].
Note that the arrow remains at the same point.
HW0483092
6.7 Cutting Planes
6.7
Cutting Planes
This section explains on how to display cross sections that are perpendicular to the X-, Y-, Zaxes directions in the cell window.
6.7.1
X-Cutting Planes
With this command, the X-cutting plane (a cutting plane which is perpendicular to the X-axis
direction in the window) can be displayed as shown in the following figure:
 Rotated centering on the Z-axis
 Shifted in parallel in the X-axis
direction.
 Rotated centering on the Y-axis

Displaying the X-Cutting Plane
When the X-cutting plane is not displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [X]

Deleting the X-Cutting Plane
When the X-cutting plane is displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Cutting Plane] button, and select [X]

Changing Display of the X-Cutting Plane
Drag the tools  to on the figure above to rotate the X-cutting plane centering on the Y- or
HW0483092
6.7 Cutting Planes
Z-axis, or shift it in a direction parallel to the X-axis.
6.7.2

Shift the X-cutting planes in a direction parallel to the X-axis.

Rotate the X-cutting planes centering on the Y-axis.

Rotate the X-cutting planes centering on the Z-axis.
Y-Cutting Planes
With this command, the Y-cutting plane (a cutting plane which is perpendicular to the Y-axis
direction in the window) can be displayed as shown in the following figure:
 Rotated centering on the Z-axis
 Rotated centering on the X-axis
 Shifted in parallel in the Y-axis
direction.

Displaying the Y-Cutting Plane
When the Y-cutting plane is not displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [Y]

Deleting the Y-Cutting Plane
When the Y-cutting plane is displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Cutting Plane] button, and select [Y]
HW0483092
6.7 Cutting Planes

Changing Display of the Y-Cutting Plane
Drag the tools  to  on the figure above to rotate the Y-cutting plane centering on the X- or
Z-axis, or shift it in a direction parallel to the Y-axis.
6.7.3

Shift the Y-cutting plane in a direction parallel to the Y-axis.

Rotate the Y-cutting plane centering on the X-axis.

Rotate the Y-cutting plane centering on the Z-axis.
Z-Cutting Planes
With this command, the Y-cutting plane (a cutting plane which is perpendicular to the Z-axis
direction in the window) can be displayed as shown in the following figure:
 Shifted in parallel in the Z-axis
direction.
 Rotated centering on the Y-axis
 Rotated centering on the X-axis

Displaying the Z-Cutting Plane
When the Z-cutting plane is not displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the
[Cutting Plane] button, and select [Z]

Deleting the Z-Cutting Plane
When the Z-cutting plane is displayed.On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Cutting Plane] button, and select [Z]
HW0483092
6.7 Cutting Planes

Changing the Z-Cutting Plane
Drag the tools  to  on the figure above to rotate the Z-cutting plane centering on the X- or
Y-axis, or shift it in a direction parallel to the Z-axis.

Shift the Z-cutting plane in a direction parallel to the Z-axis.

Rotate the Z-cutting plane centering on the X-axis.

Rotate the Z-cutting plane centering on the Y-axis.
HW0483092
6.8 Measure Distance
6.8
Measure Distance
Click 2 points to measure the distance between them.
st
Coordinate of the 1 point
Coordinate of the 2
nd
point
Difference between
the 2 points
Measure Distance dialog
Copy
Copies the measurement result to the clipboard.
Close
Closes the Measure Distance dialog.
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the [Distance] button.
HW0483092
6.8 Measure Distance
2. Click with the mouse any 2 points on models. (Blue dots on the clicked positions and a
blue line joining the points will appear.) The Measure Distance dialog will display with the
measurement results.
NOTE When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current "Pick Mode" and "Pick
Object" settings. Please refer to " 6.4 Pick Settings " for details.
HW0483092
6.9 Measure Angle
6.9
Measure Angle
Click 3 points to measure the angle between them.
Coordinates of the 3 points
Angle between the 2 lines
linking the 3 points
Measure Distance dialog
Copy
Copies the measurement result to the clipboard.
Close
Closes the Measure Angle dialog.
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the [Angle] button.
HW0483092
6.9 Measure Angle
2. Click with the mouse any 3 points on models. (Blue dots on the clicked positions and blue
lines joining the points will appear.) The Measure Angle dialog will display with the measurement results.
NOTE When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current "Pick Mode" and "Pick
Object" settings. Please refer to " 6.4 Pick Settings " for details.
This angle.
HW0483092
6.10 Measure Line
6.10 Measure Line
With this command, a dimension line can be created as shown in the figure below.

Creating a Dimension Line
Procedure
1. On the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the [Measure Line] button.
2. Click a model and drag; a dimension line with two-headed arrow appears where the
mouse is dragged across, displaying the dimension between the both ends.
NOTE

• Non-displayed model or the point where there is no model cannot be selected as a subject for the dimension line indication whereas any point of the model displayed on the
window can be selected for the dimension indication.
• When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current "Pick Mode" and
"Pick Object" settings. Please refer to " 6.4 Pick Settings " for details.
Deleting a Dimension Line
Select a dimension to be deleted, and right-click it. Select {Delete} from the pop-up menu to
delete the dimension with the dimension line.

Relocating a Dimension Line
Drag a note to a different location with on the [Home] tab, in the [Mesurement] group, click the
[Measure Line] button.
Note that the arrow remains at the same point.
HW0483092
6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode
6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode
On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Rendering Mode] button, the display mode
can be change..
SUPPLE
-MENT
• The cell is displayed in "GourandShading" mode when it is opened.
• For edition, select desired mode from "FlatShading", "GourandShading", or "Wireframe".
Flat Shading
The image displayed in flat shaded rendering mode:
Gourand Shading
The image displayed in Gourand shaded rendering mode:
Wire Frame
The image displayed in wire frame:
HW0483092
6.12 Other Display Operations
6.12 Other Display Operations
6.12.1
Changing Frame Width
Modify the frame line width for better visualization on the display.
Refer to " 10.1.5 Frame & AXIS6 " to set the frame length.
Procedure
On the [Home] tab, in the [Screen] group, click the [Line Size] button,and select the frame
width from {Small}, {Medium}, or {Large}.
6.12.2
Copying the Image
Copy the static image of the cell window: the copied data can be used in other application
software by pasting it.
Procedure
Display the cell to be copied. On the [Home] tab, in the [Tools] group, click the [Copy] button,
or hold down the Ctrl key and press the C key.
6.12.3
Dividing a Cell Window
A cell window can be divided up to four views by dragging a separator of the vertical or horizontal scroll bar in the cell window. This function provides users with different viewpoint
angles, enabling teaching or playback operations viewed from several directions.
Drag here.
HW0483092
6.12 Other Display Operations
6.12.4
Printing the Image
MotoSim EG does not have any printing function.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Tools] group, click the [Copy] button, or hard-copy the screen (Alt +
Print Screen), and paste it to another application.
HW0483092
7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot
7 Robot Settings
MotoSim EG allows many robot operations, such as adding, deleting, etc.
This chapter describes operation related to robot, jobs, data setting for tools, user coordinates
and so forth.
7.1

Adding/Deleting a Robot
Adding a Robot
The parameter file "All.prm" is required to add a robot. (In the case of an ERC robot, the
parameter file "Param.dat" and a tool file "Tool.dat" are required.)
The parameter is basically prepared by saving the parameter data stored in the controller.
Note, however, that it is also possible to use sample data from MotoSim EG.
Procedure
1. On the [Robot] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [Add] button.
2. A dialog box (Open) appears. Select the parameter for the subject robot, and click
[Open].
HW0483092
7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot
3. The Install Robot dialog box appears.
Enter the robot name in the Robot Name edit box, and click on [OK].
Robot model file is selected automatically when the parameter file is specified. However,
NOTE if the MotoSim EG folder configuration is changed, or if the robot model file has been
erased, the model file may not be selected automatically. In this case, click on [Model] to
select the robot model file.
Changing the Robot Position
The position of the robot registered in a cell can be changed by the same procedure to change
model positions. Refer to " 9.5 Positioning a Model " for details.

Copying a Robot
A robot already defined in the cell can be copied.
Procedure
1. On the [Robot] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [Copy] button.
2. The "Open" dialog box appears. Select the ALL.PRM in the robot folder, and click
[Open].
3. The "Add Robot" dialog box appears. Enter a name for the robot and click [OK].
Robot files (e.g. jobs and tool setting files) will be copied over to the current cell folder
HW0483092
7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot
and the robot will be registered.
4. Changes the position of robot in the CadTree dialog box.

Deleting a Robot
Delete the robot registered in a cell in the following procedure.
Procedure
1. On the [Robot] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [Delete] button.
HW0483092
7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot
2. A dialog box (Select Robot) appears. Select the robot to be deleted, then click on
[OK]. (Note that multiple selection is not possible in this dialog box.)
The cell folder and the file of the robot model folder in the lower layer, and the sub-folders
NOTE lower than the 2nd layer are deleted upon the delete operation executed when the [Delete
Robot,Job files] check box is ON. However, the files in the MODELS folder will not be
deleted.
When keeping the job files, execute the delete operation after clearing the [Delete
Robot,Job files] check box.
HW0483092
7.2 Controller
7.2
Controller
7.2.1
Job Management
The Select Job dialog box (see the figure below) allows to select, copy, delete the jobs. It can
also import jobs registered in other cells.
To display the Select dialog box, on the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job]
button.
Selected robot.
Folder of the
selected robot.
Selected job.
Select job folder.
Imports job in any folder to
the robot folder.
A job list registered in the
selected robot.

Displays contents of
the selected job.
Selecting a Job
Select a job from the job list, then click on [OK].
In the case of YRC1000/DX200, The job displayed on a job list can be filtered by selecting a
job folder by [Folder]. When the folder is not selected, all jobs are displayed.
NOTE Selection by [Folder] is available only YRC1000/DX200.
All jobs are always displayed other than YRC1000/DX200.
HW0483092
7.2 Controller

Job Folder Setting
In the case of YRC1000/DX200, jobs can be given the job folder setting.
1. Select any job in the job list.
2. Input any job folder name in [Folder].
3. Click the [OK] button, the confirmation message of changing the folder name is displayed.
4. Click the [Yes] button, the job folder name is changed.

Importing a Job
Procedure
1) Click on [Import].
2) Select a job, and click [Open].
3) Click [OK] to import the job.

Copying a Job
Procedure
1) Select a job to be copied, and click on [Copy...]: the Job Copy dialog box as
shown below appears.
2) Enter a job name in the Destination of Copy edit box, and click on [Copy>>].
3) The job to be copied is displayed on the right; check the item, then click on [OK]
to copy the job.

Deleting a Job
Select a job to be deleted from the job list in the Select dialog box, then click on
[Delete].
HW0483092
7.2 Controller
7.2.2
Master Job Management
The Master Job dialog box (see the figure below) allows to call, set, and cancel the master
job.
To display the Master Job dialog box, on the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select
Master Job] button.
Currently selected
job name
Robot name
Master job name
Master Job Dialog Box
Item
Function
[Call Master Job] button
Sets the master job as a selected job.
(Enabled if a master job is registered.)
[Setting Master Job] button
Registers a job selected in the job selection dialog box as a master
job. The master job is automatically selected when the cell is
opened.
(Select {Robot} - {Controller} - {Select Job} to call up the job
selection dialog box.)
[Cancel Master Job] button
Cancels the registered master job.
7.2.3
Robot Selection
Select a robot to be operated.
Simply click on the down arrow (
(See figure below)
) to display the list of robots and select the desired robot.
HW0483092
7.3 Playback
7.3
7.3.1
Playback
Cycle Time
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Cycle time] button. The latest cycle
time of playback is displayed on the following display.
Displays the maximum value of the play time.
Copies the displayed
data to the clipboard.
NOTE
7.3.2
• If robot job contain the position level "PL=0" in move command or application specific
instruction, the resulting cycle time of the simulation may not provide sufficient accuracy
compared to the actual robot.
• MotoSim EG does not support the "High-speed picking" function.
If the conveyor synchronization job uses the "High-speed picking" function, the resulting
cycle time of the simulation may not provide sufficient accuracy.
Refresh Interval
The re-drawing interval at the playback is set every second (s).
During playback, the drawing time interval can be set in the “Refresh Interval” dialog box.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Settings] group, click the [Heart Beat] button,the [Refresh Interval]
dialog appears.
The VRC sends position data to MotoSimEG-VRC for every segment (usually between 10 and
20 milliseconds). For animation purpose, the screen doesn’t need to be refreshed so quickly.
The refresh interval can be adjusted to optimize the playback visualization according to a spe-
HW0483092
7.3 Playback
cific computer capability.
7.3.3
Stage Master
The Stage Master dialog allows selecting which controller will be affected by the
playback
start command.
On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Stage Master] button, the [Stage
Master] dialog appears.
In the Stage Master dialog, put a check mark next to the controller that will be affected by the
playback start command then press [OK] to close the dialog.
[Stage Master]
Item
Function
JobSelect button
When click this button, Job Select dialog box is displayed. Displayed jobs are only jobs which are common to selected robots in
the [Stage Master] dialog box.
When select the job and click the [OK] button, the current job of all
selected robots will be changed.
OK button
Setting is saved and the [Stage Master] dialog box is closed.
Cancel button
Setting is not saved and the [Stage Master] dialog box is closed.
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
7.3.4
Servo Setting
To display the [Servo Configuration] dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback]
group, click the [Servo Configuration] button. If the [Activate Servo] check box is cleared, playback by [Start] button (
ation.
7.4
7.4.1
) will be performed without taking the servo delays in consider-
Data Setting
Tool Data Setting
The Tool Editor is used to select the active tool and to modify the tool data.
On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Tool Data] button, the [Tool Editor]
dialog appear.
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
Selected controller
Robot name
Tool Number
Incremental value of the
TOOL Editor Dialog Box
Item

Function
[OK] button
Closes the dialog box after modifying the tool data.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without modifying the data to the new values.
[Apply] button
Modifies the tool data; does not close the dialog box.
[Pick Enable]
check box
Enables mouse picking operation.
When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current"Pick Mode" and "Pick Object" settings. Please refer to " 6.4 Pick
Settings " for details.
Pressing the [Shift] key enables or disables the [Active] checkbox.
[Exp. >>] button
Displays tool load information, enabling data setting.
Setting the Tool Load Information
TOOL Editor dialog box extends to show the tool load information as follows when [Exp. >>]
button is selected.
NOTE The tool load information setting is not available for YASNAC MRC, MRC II, ERC robots.
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
7.4.2
User Frame Setting
The Set User Frame dialog box is used define user coordinate system or delete existing ones.
On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [User Frame] button, the [Set User
Frame] dialog appear.
Robot Name
User Frame Number
Coordinate system of
the parent
Incremental value of the
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
Set User Frame Dialog Box
Item
Description
Parent frame
display box
Displayed only with a controller after YRC1000.
The user coordinate system is made on the basis of the coordinate
system of the parent.
The selectable coordinate system is only [BASE coordinate system]
and [USER coordinate system].
The parent-child relation of the USER coordinate system is limited by
two levels.
[Add] button
Create a coordinate system for the selected user frame number.
[Delete] button
Delete the coordinate system of the selected user frame number.
[Pick Enable]
check box
Enables mouse picking operation to move the user frame to the clicked
position.
When clicking in an area the selected point depends on the current
"Pick Mode" and "Pick Object" settings. Please refer to " 6.4 Pick Settings " for details.
Pressing the [Shift] key enables or disables the [Active] checkbox.
[OK] button
Closes the dialog box after confirming the overwrite of user frame.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without modifying the data to the new values.
Procedure
1. Select the user frame number to be edited with the top left combobox.
2. If the selected UF#2 doesn't already exist, press to the [Add] button.
3. Check the [Active] checkbox, and then left-click with the mouse on the cell window to
move the user frame to the clicked position.
4. If necessary, set the axis values to move the user frame.
5. Press [OK] to save the user frame settings.
7.4.3
Robot Calibration Setting
An external axis for a station can be automatically build using the file information for robot calibration (rbcalib.dat).
To display the [Coordinated Motion Calibration] dialog box, on the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Robot Calibration] button.
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
Robot Calibration Setting Dialog Box
Item
Function
[Close] button

Closes Robot Calibration Setting dialog box.
Creating an Environment using Actual Robot Calibration Files
Procedure
1. To register a robot, follow the procedures described in " 7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot ".
Close the cell file after saving it.
Make sure that the robot to be registered has a parameter file (All.prm) with the following optional parameter enabled: if this option is not enabled, the station coordination
function does not operate properly.
Parameter Item
Setting Value
FD7
1
Function
Coordinated functional option
2. Copy the "ALL.prm", "tool.end" and "rbcalib.dat" from the actual controller to the robot
folder.
3. Open the cell.
4. Select {Robot} - {Data Setting} - {Robot Calibration}.
Note that the menu selection is disabled if the station coordination function is not
enabled in the parameter file. In this case, set the parameter FD07 to "1", then open
the cell once again.
5. The Robot Calibration Setting dialog box appears: click on [Layout by reading robot
calibration file].
6. The external axis of the station is located according to the file information.
Example 1: For one 2-axis station
As shown in the following figure, ST1_UP6_ex1 and ST1_UP6_ex2 are automatically
created as parents of UP6_ex1 and UP6_ex2, respectively.
Since ST_UP6_ex1 and 2 are to be the bases of the external axes, these models
contain information on the axis postures.
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
The information on the position (X, Y and Z) of the station is described in ST1_UP6.
Example 2: For two 1-axis stations
The following figure is an example in which a servotrack and two single-axis stations
are used. ST1_UP6_ex2 and ST2_UP6_ex3 are created in the same way as
explained in Example 1.
7. Finally, add models of the station base, tilting axis, turn table, and other necessary
models: models are added with ST1_UP6, UP6_ex1, and UP6_ex2 as parents for the
station base, tilting axis, turn table, respectively.

Constructing an Environment with MotoSim EG
Procedure
1. To register a robot with axes, follow the procedures described in " 7.1 Adding/Deleting
a Robot ": close the cell file after saving it.
Make sure that the robot to be registered has a parameter file (All.prm) with the following optional parameter enabled: if this option is not enabled, the station coordination
function does not operate properly.
Parameter Item
Setting Value
FD7
1
Function
Coordinated functional option
2. Use the Position Panel dialog box to move the external axis to 0-pulse position, the
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
home position. (The Position Panel dialog box appears by clicking on
{Tool} - {Monitor} - {Position Panel...}.)
, or select
3. Move the top axis of each station to the desired position using the POS function on the
Cad Tree: for example, move UP6_ex2 if a two-axis station is used, and move
UP6_ex3 if a base axis is provided.
For the axis posture, the Z-axis must be in the rotating direction of the rotary axis (turn
table), and the Y-axis must be in the rotating direction of the tilting axis.
4. On the main menu, select {Robot} - {Data Setting} - {Robot Calibration}.
Note that the menu selection is disabled if the station coordination function is not
enabled in the parameter file. In this case, set the parameter FD07 to "1" then restart
the system.
5. The Robot Calibration Setting dialog box appears: click on [Write robot calibration file
by layout on MotoSim].
6. A robot calibration file "rbcalib.dat" is created according to the position of the external
axis.
7. Create a model referring to the step 7 of " Creating an Environment using Actual Robot
Calibration Files ".
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
7.4.4
Soft Limit Setting
The robot soft limits define the pulse range within which the robot axes can move. To modify
the soft limits, on the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Soft Limit] button.
Soft Limit Setting
Item
Function
[OK] button
Updates the robot parameters (All.prm) with the values entered in the
Soft Limit Setting dialog.
[Cancel] button
Discards the soft limit modifications and closes the dialog.
NOTE
• Because this function will overwrite the parameter, it is recommended to make a backup
of the parameter file (All.prm) before doing any modifications.
• For setting soft limits to devices (i.e. Conveyor), please refer to section 10 Peripheral
Equipment.
Procedure
1. Modify the soft limit values and then press the [OK] button.
2. A confirmation message will display.
HW0483092
7.4 Data Setting
Press [OK] to update the parameters and close the setting dialog. Or, press [Cancel]
to return to the "Soft Limit Setting" dialog without updating the parameters.
3. In order for the parameter change to take affect, close cell (save the cell first if necessary) and reopen it.
HW0483092
7.5 Robot Settings
7.5
Robot Settings
7.5.1
Model Setting
The "Robot Settings" diaog can be used to change the robots name and their model files. On
the [Robot] tab, in the [Robot] group, click the [Model Setting] button, the [Robot Settings] dialog appears.
Procedure
1. Select a robot from the robot list. Its name and model file will display in the corresponding field in the section below the robot list.
2. Edit the robot name or select a new model file.
3. If multiple changes are required, repeat the above steps. As new selections are made
the data in the robot list will be updated.
4. When all the changes have been entered, press the “OK” button to apply those
changes and close the “Robot Settings” dialog. Or, press “Cancel” to discard the
changes.
7.5.2
Reach View
The range of motion of the robot can be displayed in 2D or 3D. To create or delete Reach
View models, on the [Robot] tab, in the [Robot] group, click the [TCP Reach] button, the
[Reach Area] dialog appears.
HW0483092
7.5 Robot Settings
Reach Area Dialog Box
Item
“Mode” section
Description
Selects P-point or tool end as a base point of range of motion.
Specifies display style for range of motion. (For some robot models,
3D display is not available.)
• [2D] radio button: displays range of motion in 2D style.
• [3D] radio button: displays range of motion in 3D style.
“Disp” section
Range of motion can be displayed in both 2D and 3D
NOTE style simultaneously: Select 2D and press the [Apply]
button; then select 3D, change color (optional) and press
apply again.
“Level” section
Selects display level (rough/standard/fine) of range of motion.
[Color] button
Displays Color dialog box to specify colors.
[Delete] button
Deletes the previously created Reach View models.
[Create] button
Creates a Reach View model of the specified style representing the
range of motion of the cell active robot.
[Close] button
Closes Reach Area dialog box.
7.5.3
Robot Information
Set the offset value of the subject robot frame and the warm up time in the Robot Information
dialog box shown below. To open the Robot Information dialog box, on the [Robot] tab, in the
[Robot] group, click the [Robot Information] button.
HW0483092
7.5 Robot Settings
Robot Information Dialog Box
Item
Corresponding Dialog Box
AXIS6 Dlg dialog box appears: set the robot offset value for each axis.
[Offset Of Robot Frame]
button
Warm Up Time dialog box appears: set the robot warm-up time.
[Warm Up Time] button
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
7.6
Peripheral Equipment
Peripheral Equipment or Device are considered as a RCS controllers. Their name appears in
the Controller lists with the other controllers. They can be programmed to move in the same
manner as a robot controller by creating jobs and then playing them back.
Three types of device are available: conveyor, press and gantry.
7.6.1

Adding a Conveyor
Adding a Conveyor
Conveyors are device that can be setup with 1 to 3 linear axis (X, Y, Z).
To add a conveyor to the cell. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the
[New] button, and select [Conveyor] the [Conveyor Installation] dialog appears.
Up to 6 conveyors can be added to a cell. The conveyor is registered as a controller with
NOTE the name displayed in the "Name" edit box of the Conveyor Install dialog box. This name
is determine by the selection of the conveyor number and cannot be changed.
The conveyor name is automatically completed
when the conveyor No. is selected.
Conveyor Installation dialog box
Item
Description
"No" section
Specifies the conveyor number.
"Joint Num" section
Specifies the number of axis by selecting one of the radio buttons.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
Conveyor Installation dialog box
Item
[OK] button

Description
Adds the conveyor to the cell and then displays the “Conveyor Setting”
dialog box.
Refer to " 7.6.1 Adding a Conveyor " for details.
Conveyor Setting
Specify the dimensions, speed, and operating range of the conveyor to be registered in the
Edit Conveyor Information dialog box.
This dialog is automatically displayed when a new conveyor is installed. It can also be displayed afterward to modify the conveyer settings by selecting:
On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Setting] button.
Conveyor Setting dialog box
Item
"No" section
Description
Specifies the conveyor number to set the condition.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
Conveyor Setting dialog box
Item
Description
Specifies the dimensions of the conveyor to be registered.
"Model info" section
"L(mm)" edit box
Entire length of the conveyor.
"D(mm)" edit box
Width of the conveyor.
"H(mm)" edit box
Thickness of the conveyor. (Distance from
the floor to the conveyor top.)
"Org(mm)" edit box
Limit switch position for the conveyor home
position. (Distance from the conveyor end.)
Specifies the dimensions of the conveyor to be registered.
"Speed(mm/s)"
edit box
"Motion info" section
[make model] check box
NOTE
Operation speed of the conveyor.
"Start(mm)"
edit box
Start position of the conveyor operation.
(Specify the distance from the home position
of the conveyor.)
"End(mm)"
edit box
End position of the conveyor operation.
(Specify the distance from the home position
of the conveyor.)
Creates a default conveyor model.
• When the default conveyor model is modified, clear the [make model] check box unless
the default conveyor model is to be used. If the [make model] check box is not cleared,
the modification for the model becomes invalid, and the model is restored to the default
model.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
7.6.2
Adding a Press
Presses are device that have 3 linear axis (X, Y, Z). By default, only the Z-axis is enabled to
move because the X and Y axes motion have been restrained by soft limits. To change the
soft limit restriction please refer to the " 7.6.4 Modifying the Soft Limit of a Device " section.
To add a press to the cell. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the
[New] button, and select [Press] .
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [New] button, and
select [Press] the [Press] dialog appears.
Select if the default press model is to be used or not by checking or unchecking the
[Make Model] check box. (The [Make Model] check box is selected by default.)
Press the [OK] button.
2. Enter the name of the press in the “Device Install” dialog, as shown in the figure below.
Press the [OK] button.
3. The press is added to the cell and a model is automatically generated if the [Make
Model] option was checked in the “Press” dialog.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
7.6.3
Adding a Gantry
A gantry device is composed of a “robot” model (RB1) with three linear axes (X, Y, Z) for the
base and a “station” model (ST1) with three external rotation axes for the head (Rx, Ry, Rz).
The control point (TCP) is thoroughly determined by the three rectangular linear axes, and is
independent of the external axes.
To add a gantry to the cell. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the
[New] button, and select [Gantry] .
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [New] button, and
select [Gantry] the [Gantry] dialog appears.
Select the check box to specify if the following items in “Gantry” dialog box are
required.
[Series List] check box: Configuration of external rotation axis.
(Checked: serial configuration; cleared: parallel configuration.)
[Make Model] check box: Creation of a model. (Check the box if model creation is
desired.)
Note that both check boxes are selected by default.
Press the [OK] button.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
2. Enter the name of the gantry in the “Device Install” dialog, as shown in the figure below.
Press the [OK] button.
3. The gantry is added to the cell and a model is automatically generated if the [Make
Model] option was checked in the “Gantry” dialog.
7.6.4
Modifying the Soft Limit of a Device
The motion range of device can be modified with the “Soft Limit Setting” dialog.
Procedure
1. On the [Controller] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Soft Limit] button, the
[Soft Limit Setting] dialog appears.
2. Select the device to be edited from the “Name” combobox.
Note that when a gantry device is selected, the dialog expand to also display settings
for the Rx, Ry, Rz axes.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
3. Modify the values as required and press the [Apply] button to make the modification.
4. Press “Close” to close the dialog.
5. For the modification to take affect, close the cell file and then open it again.
NOTE To enable the modifications, reload the cell.
7.6.5
Moving a Device
Devices can be moved by using the Position Panel.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [Position Panel] button, the [Position
Panel] dialog appears.
Unlike other robots, they can only be moved using the “Pulse” or “Joint” frame coordinate system. Using the “Joint” frame is the equivalent of a rectangular coordinate system (coordinate
X, Y, Z in millimeters).
Gantry also have a station (external axes) mounted at the end of the robot TCP (X, Y, Z axes)
that allows Rx, Ry and Rz rotations. To move this axis, change the selection in the robot com-
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
bobox to the robot name ending by “-ST1”.
For further detail on the Position Panel operation, please refer to section " 8.1 Programming
Pendant " .
7.6.6
Programming a Device
Devices can be programmed to move in the same manner as a robot controller by creating
jobs and then playing them back.
The Job panel is used to display the job and allow teaching. On the [Controller] tab, in the
[External Device] group, click the [Job Panel] button, the [Job Panel] dialog appears.
Selected job
Adds, modifies or deletes
instructions.
Synchronizes the robot
position with the current
position in the display box.
Displays the “Select Job”
dialog
Select the [Enter] button
processing mode.
Job display box
Adds multiple lines of
instructions at a time by
entering coordinate
values.
- Updates the job if it has been edited with other software.
- Moves the cursor to the step of the current robot position.
If the cell contains multiple devices and the "Multiple Controller Dialog" mode is enable, a
NOTE separate Job panel can be displayed for each device in the cell. Select the device to be
displayed in the controller combobox of the toolbar before displaying the Job panel.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
Job Panel
Item
Job selection
combobox
Description
Select the current job from the dropdown list or click on the [...] button
to its right to display the “Select Job” dialog. (Refer to the " Select Job "
section for details.
The device moves to the step selected in the job display panel if the
[Sync] step synchronization check box is selected.
JOB Edit dialog box for job editing appears by double-clicking the
selected line.
Job display box
[Enter] button
JOB Edit Dialog Box:
Modify the instruction in the edit box. Select either the [Add Line] or
[Replace Line] button.
Executes the command selected among [Del], [Add], [Mod] radio buttons.
Displays the Interpolation dialog box.
Specify motion type, speed and position level for the playback operation, and click [OK].
[MOVE...] button
To enable the modification of the motion type and speed
NOTE when a teaching position is modified, select the [Allow
Modif.] check box.
[Close] button
Closes the Job Panel
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment

Select Job
The Select Job dialog box (see the figure below) allows to select, copy, delete the jobs. It can
also import jobs registered in other cells.
Selected controller
Controller folder
Selected job
List of the jobs in the controller folder.
Displays the content
of the selected job.
Selecting a Job
Select a job from the job list, then click on [OK].
Creating a Job
Type the name of the new job in the “Selected Job” field. The job name may not
exceed 8 characters and cannot contain any spaces.
Importing a Job
Procedure
1) Click on [Import].
2) Select a job, and click [Open].
3) Click [OK] to import the job.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
Copying a Job
Procedure
1) Select a job to be copied, and click on [Copy...]: the Job Copy dialog box as
shown below appears.
2) Enter a job name in the Destination of Copy edit box, and click on [Copy>>].
3) The job to be copied is displayed on the right; check the item, then click on [OK]
to copy the job.
Deleting a Job
Select a job to be deleted from the job list in the Select dialog box, then click on [Delete].

Input of Coordinates (AxisInput)
Press [AxisInput] in the Job Panel to display Axis Data Input dialog box shown below, and create a list by entering coordinate values (either pulse or rectangle). Instructions are added to
the job for each point of the list.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
Axis Data Input Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Pulse] radio button
Coordinate values are entered in pulse value.
[Rectangle] radio button
Coordinate values are entered in rectangle value.
[CSV File Load] button
Loads the coordinate values from a CSV file, and inserts the coordinate values right after the selected line in the list.
[Line Insert] button
Inserts the coordinate entered in the Axis Input dialog box right after
the selected line in the list.
[Line Edit] button
Edits the selected line in the Axis Input dialog box.
[Line Delete] button
Deletes the selected line from the list. (Multiple selection is
allowed.)
[OK] button
Closes the Axis Data Input dialog box; the list is added as instructions.
[Cancel] button
Closes the Axis Data Input dialog box without modifying the job.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
Axis Input Dialog Box
Item
Description
Coordinate
Pulse/Rectangle
Radio Button selected in
the Axis Data Input Dialog Box
Pulse
Rectangle
S/X
S-axis
X-axis
L/Y
L-axis
Y-axis
U/Z
U-axis
Z-axis
R/Rx
R-axis
Rx-axis
B/Ry
B-axis
Ry-axis
T/RZ
T-axis
Rz-axis
[OK] button
Applies the modification, and closes the Axis Input dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the Axis Input dialog box without executing the modification.
Procedure
1. Select either the [Pulse] or [Rectangle] radio button in Axis Data Input dialog box.
2. Edit coordinate values with [Line Insert], [Line Edit], or [Line Delete], and create a list.
If a CSV file already exists, load coordinate values by selecting [CSV File Load].
3. When the list is completed, press [OK] to add the created list as instructions after the
selected line in the job.
The motion type and speed of MOVE instructions which have been added with the input of
NOTE coordinates are the set values specified in Interpolation dialog box displayed by clicking
[MOVE...] in the Job Panel.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
7.6.7

Other Operations with devices
Deleting a Device
Device and their model can be deleted by using the same procedure as other controllers.
On the [Controller] tab, in the [Setup] group, click the [Delete] button, the [Select Controller/
Robot] dialog appears..

I/O Signals for Devices
Devices also have I/O signals that can be use to interact with other controllers in the cell.
They can be used in a similar way than those of a VRC controller.
Device I/O Monitor
The I/O Monitor for device is displayed in the same way as other controller but the displayed
dialog is different.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [I/O Monitor] button, the [I/O Monitor]
dialog appears
If the cell contains multiple device and the "Multiple Controller Dialog" mode is enable, a
NOTE separate I/O Monitor can be displayed for each device in the cell. Select the device to be
displayed in the controller combobox of the toolbar before displaying the I/O Monitor.
I/O Monitor can display signals change from an instruction and also give signals to the robot
by selecting an IN signal before or during playback.
The I/O data specified in I/O Monitor can be saved as well.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
I/O Monitor Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Group No]
Specifies the I/O group number to display.
[Set all IN-Signal] check box
Turns ON all the IN signals of all registered robots. Uncheck
the box to turn OFF all the IN signals.
[Set all OT-Signal] check box
Turns ON all the OUT signals of all registered robots. Uncheck
the box to turn OFF all the OUT signals.
[Clear I/O] button
Clears all the signals of the selected robot.
[Close] button
Closes I/O Monitor dialog box.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
7.6.8
Conveyor Operation Panel
This panel is used to operate the conveyor with 1 axis.
To operate the conveyor with multi-axis, refer to section " 7.6.5 Moving a Device ".
Setting the conveyor
Conveyor Operation Panel
Item
Position
Description
To set the conveyer position for teaching the robot, input the
number or set the number by the
button.
The position of conveyor in [Position] is
NOTE reflected LS offset value of the each robot.
When the other robot is selected, the position of
conveyor in [Position] is changed, without the
displayed conveyor is not operating.
Conveyor Power On
When this is turned off during playback, the review on stopping
the conveyor is enabled.
Robot Moving with Conveyor
If this is turned on, the selected robot moves with conveyor on
operating the conveyor.
When [Robot Moving with Conveyor] is used, set the conveyor
synchronization of the selected robot in advance.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
7.6.9
Conveyor Synchronization
This panel is used to set the synchronization condition between the robot and the conveyor.
If the conveyor synchronization option is available, this panel is displayed automatically when
the conveyor is added. Refer to section " 11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function " about
conveyor synchronization option.
To change the synchronization condition of registered conveyor. On the [Controller] tab, in the
[External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Condition File] button, the [Conveyor Synchronization] dialog appears.
Conveyor Synchronization Setting
Item
Description
Robot
The list of the controller which can use the conveyor synchronized function is displayed. Select the controller by the list.
Conveyor No
Select the conveyor synchronized with the controller selected by
[Robot].
Conveyor Info
The name and speed of the conveyor selected by [Conveyor
No] is displayed.
HW0483092
7.6 Peripheral Equipment
Conveyor Synchronization Setting
Item
Condition
Description
[Condition File No]
: Select the conveyor condition file of
the selected conveyor and controller.
the file is registered by the virtual
pendant.
[Tracking]
: Specify whether to carry out the synchronization with the robot-axis or the
base-axis.
[Base Axis]
: When the [Base Axis] is selected by
[Tracking], the selected axis is dis
played.
[Direction Rev]
: When the [Base Axis] is selected by
[Tracking], the item is displayed.
When the conveyor traveling direction is opposite of the forward direction of base axis, this item is "ON".
[Average Time (msec)] : The averaged travel time of conveyor
is displayed.
[User Frame No]
: The user frame number of the conveyor direction is displayed. The user
frame number corresponding to the
conveyor number is selected automatically.
[LS offset (mm)]
: Set the distance of the conveyor origin
position. When this item is set to
1000mm, the conveyor origin position
of the selected robot is located
1000mm before the origin position on
the display.
HW0483092
7.7 Cube Area View
7.7
Cube Area View
The "Cube Area View (cube interference area)" which is set in the actual controller can be displayed as cubic models and modified.
NOTE Cube interference area is not available for YASNAC MRC, MRCáU and ERC type robots.
7.7.1
Displaying the Cube Interference Area
The cube interference areas defined for a robot can be displayed as cubic model in the cell.
On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Cube Collision Area] button and
select [Draw Cube Area Model].
If cubic interference areas are not defined in the robot parameters (All.prm), cubic models
NOTE will not display. Cubic interference area can be defined or modify by MotoSimEG, please
refer to section " 7.7.3 Setting the Cube Interference Area " for details.
7.7.2
Deleting the Cube Interference Area
Delete the cube interference area displayed on the cell window. On the [Robot] tab, in the [File
Settings] group, click the [Cube Collision Area] button and select [Delete Cube Area Model].
HW0483092
7.7 Cube Area View
7.7.3
Setting the Cube Interference Area
Define or edit the cube interference areas of a robot. On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings]
group, click the [Cube Collision Area] button and select [Cube Area Setting].
Area Value
Setting
Increment
Amount
Cube Interferce Area Dialog Box
Item
“Cube Display
Properties” section
Function
[Opacity]
Specifies the opacity of the model.
The value can be set between 1.00 and 0.00, which corresponds
respectively to fully opaque and completely transparent.
[Color]
Displays "Color" dialog box to specify colors.
HW0483092
7.7 Cube Area View
Cube Interferce Area Dialog Box
Item
Function
“Cube Interference
Setting” section
[No.]
Select the cube number for which the settings will be displayed. A
maximum of 32 cubes can be defined.
[Control Group]
Select the control group for which the cube is defined. If the value is
set to NONE the cube is considered undefined. To define a cube this
value is normally be set to ROBOT1.
[Check Method]
Selects if the checked position is the COMMAND position or the
FEEDBACK position.
[Ref. Coordinate]
Defines the coordinate system in which the area values are defined.
In the case of the "USER" coordinate system, the user frame number
also needs to be defined.
Updates the robot parameters (All.prm) with the values entered in the
"Cube Interference Area" dialog and closes the dialog.
[OK] button
NOTE The data for all the cubes will be saved, not only the one
currently displayed.
[Cancel] button
Discards the cube interference modifications and closes the dialog.
NOTE Because this function will overwrite the parameter, it is recommended to make a backup of
the parameter file (All.prm) before doing any modifications.
Procedure
1. Modify the cube interference definition and then press the [OK] button.
2. A confirmation message will display.
Press [OK] to update the parameters and close the setting dialog. Or, press [Cancel] to
return to the "Cube Interference Area" dialog without updating the parameters.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
7.8
Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
Display the model from Safety Function File. And the file can be edited.
Following function is available in MotoSim EG.
• Display the robot range limit data
• Edit the safety function data
• Display the tool interference model
• Display the robot approximate model
NOTE
7.8.1
• This function is available only when the controller is YRC1000/DX200 and the parameter
of safety function is available.
• To use this function, it is necessary to put the data files into the robot folder.
(ex. RBRNGLMT.DAT, TOOLINTF.DAT)
• This function does not simulate of safety function.
• This function is available R1 only. When editing data, check the file if the group setting is
R1. And, the signal setting is all available regardless of whether the functional safety
boards are used.
• When the edited files are loaded to YRC1000/DX200, it is necessary to check the settings on YRC1000/DX200.
• When the edited files are loaded to YRC1000/DX200, it is necessary to put in "SAFETY
MODE", and to disable "SAVE DATA CRC CHECK FUNC.(FSU)". After loading, please
make sure to enable "SAVE DATA CRC CHECK FUNC.(FSU)". And, please make sure
to check the settings on DX200.
Displaying Robot Range Limit Data
Display the model from the Robot Range Limit Data (RBRNGLMT.DAT).
On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Function Safety] button, and select
[Safety Function File]. And, choose the [Robot Range Limit] tab. This tab is available only
when the Robot Range Limit Data exists in the robot folder.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
Parameter
[Robot Range Limit]
Item
Function
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the parameter is displayed.
[Add Model]
The model of selected file number is displayed. Click the vertex
list when the model is displayed, teacher model is moved to that
position.
File No.
[Delete Model]
The model of selected file number is cleared.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
[Robot Range Limit]
Item
Function
Parameter
For those details or Editing them, please refer to the following manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION"
Range Combination
Range combination dialog appears, and combine the ranges.
Model Settings
Set the contents of Inside model or Outside/Plane model.
[Color]
Displays the Color Dialog to change the color of model.
[Opacity]
Specifies the opacity of model. The value can be set between 1.00
and 0.00, which corresponds respectively to fully opaque and
completely transparent.
[Add All Model]
The models of all file number are displayed.
[Delete All Model]
The models of all file number are cleared.
Save File
Save the contents to the Robot Range Limit Data
(RBRNGLMT.DAT).
Close
Close the dialog.

Area Combination
Creates a new area by combining two already-specified areas.
Click the [Area Combination] button, the [Range Combination] dialog is displayed.
For details, please refer to the following manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
[Range Combination]
Item
Function
Input File1
Select the input file1.
Logic
Select "AND" or "OR".
Input File2
Select the input file2.
Output File
Select the output file.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
[Range Combination]
Item
Function
Combine
Execute Combination.
Close
Close the dialog.
When combination is finished, the following dialog is displayed. Click the [OK] button, a new
area is written to output file. Click the [Cancel] button, a new area is not written.
When overwriting is finished, the following dialog is displayed. Click the [OK] button, a new
area model is displayed. Click the [Cancel] button, a new area model is not displayed.
7.8.2
Editing the Safety Function Data
Edit the safety function file. Following files are available. To edit the files, it is necessary to put
them into the robot folder. On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Function
Safety] button, and select [Safety Function File]. The [Safety Function File Settings] dialog
appears.
• Robot Range Limit Data (RBRNGLMT.DAT)
• Axis Range Limit Data (AXRNGLMT.DAT)
• Axis Speed Monitor Data (AXSPDMON.DAT)
• Speed Limit Data (SPDLMT.DAT)
• Tool Angle Monitor Data (TLANGMON.DAT)
• Tool Change Monitor Data (TLCHGMON.DAT)

Robot Range Limit Data
Edit the Robot Range Limit Data (RBRNGLMT.DAT).
Choose the {Robot Range Limit} tab. This tab is available only when the Robot Range Limit
Data exists in the robot folder. For details, please refer to "7.8.1 Robot Range Limit Function".
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function

Axis Range Limit Data
Edit the Axis Range Limit Data (AXRNGLMT.DAT).
Choose the {Axis Range Limit} tab. This tab is available only when the Axis Range Limit Data
exists in the robot folder.
Parameter
[Axis Range Limit]
Item
Function
File No.
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the parameter is displayed.
Parameter
For those details or Editing them, please refer to the following manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION"
Save File
Save the contents to the Axis Range Limit Data (AXRNGLMT.DAT).
Close
Close the dialog.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function

Axis Speed Monitor Data
Edit the Axis Speed Monitor Data (AXSPDMON.DAT).
Choose the {Axis Speed Monitor} tab. This tab is available only when the Axis Speed Monitor
Data exists in the robot folder.
Parameter
[Axis Speed Monitor]
Item
Function
File No.
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the parameter is displayed.
Parameter
For those details or Editing them, please refer to the following manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION"
Save File
Save the contents to the Axis Speed Monitor Data (AXSPDMON.DAT).
Close
Close the dialog.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function

Speed Limit Data
Edit the Speed Limit Data (SPDLMT.DAT).
Choose the {Speed Limit} tab. This tab is available only when the Speed Limit Data exists in
the robot folder.
Parameter
[Speed Limit]
Item
Function
File No.
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the parameter is displayed.
Select the Speed Limit in Teach Mode, the setting of it is available.
Parameter
For those details or Editing them, please refer to the following manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION"
Save File
Save the contents to the Speed Limit Data (SPDLMT.DAT).
Close
Close the dialog.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function

Tool Angle Monitor Data
Edit the Tool Angle Monitor Data (TLANGMON.DAT).
Choose the {Tool Angle Monitor} tab. This tab is available only when the Tool Angle Monitor
Data exists in the robot folder.
Parameter
[Tool Angle Monitor]
Item
Function
File No.
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the parameter is displayed.
Parameter
For those details or Editing them, please refer to the following manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION"
Save File
Save the contents to the Tool Angle Monitor Data (TLANGMON.DAT).
Close
Close the dialog.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function

Tool Change Monitor Data
Edit the Tool Change Monitor Data (TLCHGMON.DAT).
Choose the {Tool Change Monitor} tab. This tab is available only when the Tool Change Monitor Data exists in the robot folder.
Parameter
[Tool Change Monitor]
Item
Function
File No.
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the parameter is displayed.
Parameter
For those details or Editing them, please refer to the following manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION"
Save File
Save the contents to the Tool Change Monitor Data (TLCHGMON.DAT).
Close
Close the dialog.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
7.8.3
Displaying the Tool Interference Model
Display the tool interference model from the Tool Interference Data (TOOLINTF.DAT).
On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Function Safety] button, and select
[Tool Interference Model]. The [Tool Interference] dialog appears. This dialog is available only
when the Tool Interference Data exists in the robot folder.
[Tool Interference]
Item
File No.
Function
Select the file number. When selecting the file number, the parameter is displayed.
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
[Tool Interference]
Item
Function
Data No.
Select the data number.
[Points]
Specify the X, Y, and Z of two points.
[Radius]
Specify the radius of sphere and cylinder.
For those details or Editing them, please refer to the following
manuals.
"YRC1000 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL
SAFETY BOARD OPERATION"
"DX200 OPTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
BOARD OPERATION"
Model Settings
Display/Clear the tool interference model.
[Color]
Displays the Color Dialog to change the color of model.
[Opacity]
Specifies the opacity of model. The value can be set between 1.00
and 0.00, which corresponds respectively to fully opaque and
completely transparent.
[Add Model]
The model of the file number is displayed.
[Delete Model]
The model of the file number is cleared.
Save File
Save the contents to the Tool Interference Data (TOOLINTF.DAT).
Close
Close the dialog.
7.8.4
Displaying the Robot Approximate Model
Display the robot approximate model from robot parameter (ALL.PRM).
On the [Robot] tab, in the [File Settings] group, click the [Function Safety] button, and select
[Robot Approximate Model].
HW0483092
7.8 Displaying model / Editing Data of Safety Function
[Robot Approximate Model]
Item
Show Model
Function
Display the approximate model.
[Color]
Displays the Color Dialog to change the color of model.
[Opacity]
Specifies the opacity of model. The value can be set between 1.00
and 0.00, which corresponds respectively to fully opaque and
completely transparent.
NOTE When the parameter does not have approximate
model, the model is not displayed.
Delete Model
Clear the approximate model.
HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
8 Tool Functions
MotoSim EG has tools to operate and teach a robot, including functions to display the current
position and pulses of the robot; it also has functions that simplifies teaching operations such
as OLP (on-screen teaching function to teach target point) and interference check function.
This chapter explains each function and its application.
8.1
8.1.1
Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant
The Programming Pendant dialog box is a tool to move a robot in MotoSim EG and perform
teaching.
Since this tool can be used in the same way as an actual programming pendant, it allows
users to simulate the actual operations.
To display the Programming Pendant dialog box, on the [Robot] tab, in the [VPP] group, click
the [Show] button..
If the cell contains multiple robots and the "Multiple Robot Dialog" mode is enable, a sepa-
NOTE rate Programming Pendant can be displayed for each robot in the cell. Select the robot to
be displayed in the robot combobox of the toolbar before displaying the Programming
Pendant.
HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
Title bar: Selected Robot.
Job display box
Opens the Job Select
dialog box.
Job name of the displayed job.
Selects operating coordinate
system when the robot is
moved by manual operation.
Sets manipulator motion speed
during the manual operation.
Selects user frame No.
in operation.
Synchronizes the robot with
the selected step in the Job
display box.
Changes coordinate system
to use external axis for
manual operation.
Check this check box to
enable translational motion
of the station axis.
Moves the cursor to the step
of the current robot position.
Enables coordinated motion
with selected axis.
Display selected motion type
and speed to be added or
modified.
Axis operation keys:
Operates each axis of robot.
Adds, deletes or modifies
instructions or data.
Selects [ENTER] button
processing mode.
Programming Pendant Box
Item
Title bar
Job display box
Description
Displays the name of the robot selected for the programming pendant
operation.If the "Multiple Robot Dialog" mode is disabled, the robot
name changes when the cell robot selection is changed.
The robot moves to the step selected in the job display panel if the
[Sync] step synchronization check box is selected.
JOB Edit dialog box for job editing appears by double-clicking the
selected job.
(For the teaching of position variables, refer to " Sequencer Connection Setting " in " 8.2.3 Variable Monitor ".)
JOB Edit Dialog Box:
Modify the instruction in the edit box. Select either the [Add Line] or
[Replace Line] button. HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant Box
Item
Description
Only If YRC1000/DX200
Right-click on the line, the [Line Status] menu is displayed. By the
menu, the edit lock status or comment status can be added to the line.
In the case of edit lock, "EDTLCK" is added the line. In the case of
comment, "COMM" is added the line.
Job display box
The line status setting is also available by the Job Edit dialog box.
Displays the Interpolation dialog box.
Specify motion type, speed and position level for the playback operation, and click [OK].
[Move...] button
To enable the modification of the motion type and speed
NOTE when a teaching position is modified, select the [Allow
Modif.] check box.
[OLP] button
Displays the OLP dialog box. (Refer to " 8.3.1 OLP " for details.)
[Position] button
Displays the position data panel. (Refer to " 8.2.1 Position Panel " for
details.)
[Long] button
Extends the size of the job display panel: click [Short] to undo the size
change.
HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant Box
Item
Description
Operates the robot: the display varies as shown below, depending on
the selected operating coordinate system for manual operation.
Axis operation keys
Link
8.1.2
Rectangular, Tool, User
External Axes
Job Panel
The Job panel displays the robot job and allows teaching. To display the Job Panel, on the
[Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [Position Panel] button.
If the cell contains multiple robots and the "Multiple Robot Dialog" mode is enable, a sepa-
NOTE rate Job panel can be displayed for each robot in the cell. Select the robot to be displayed
in the robot combobox of the toolbar before displaying the Job panel.
Job name of the displayed job.
Opens the Job
Select dialog box.
Synchronizes the robot position
with the cursor position in job
display box.
Adds multiple lines of instructions
at atime by entering coordinate
values.
・Updates the job if it has been
edited with other software.
・Moves the cursor to the step of
current robot positon.
Selects [ENTER]
button processing
mode.
Job display box.
HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
Job Panel
Item
Description
The robot moves to the step selected in the job display panel if the
[Sync] step synchronization check box is selected.
JOB Edit dialog box for job editing appears by double-clicking the
selected line.
(For the teaching of position variables, refer to " Sequencer Connection Setting " in " 8.2.3 Variable Monitor ".)
JOB Edit Dialog Box:
Modify the instruction in the edit box. Select either the [Add Line] or
[Replace Line] button.
Job display box
Only If YRC1000/DX200
Right-click on the line, the [Line Status] menu is displayed. By the
menu, the edit lock status or comment status can be added to the line.
In the case of edit lock, "EDTLCK" is added the line. In the case of
comment, "COMM" is added the line.
The line status setting is also available by the Job Edit dialog box
[Enter] button
Executes the command selected among [Del], [Add], [Mod] radio buttons.
HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
Job Panel
Item
Description
Displays the Interpolation dialog box.
Specify motion type, speed and position level for the playback operation, and click [OK].
[MOVE...] button
To enable the modification of the motion type and speed
NOTE when a teaching position is modified, select the [Allow
Modif.] check box.
[Close] button

Closes the Job Panel
Input of Coordinates (AxisInput)
Press [AxisInput] in the Job Panel to display Axis Data Input dialog box shown below, and create a list by entering coordinate values (either pulse or rectangle). Instructions are added to
the job for each point of the list.
Axis Data Input Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Pulse] radio button
Coordinate values are entered in pulse value.
[Rectangle] radio button
Coordinate values are entered in rectangle value.
[CSV File Load] button
Loads the coordinate values from a CSV file, and inserts the coordinate values right after the selected line in the list.
HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
Axis Data Input Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Line Insert] button
Inserts the coordinate entered in the Axis Input dialog box right after
the selected line in the list.
[Line Edit] button
Edits the selected line in the Axis Input dialog box.
[Line Delete] button
Deletes the selected line from the list. (Multiple selection is
allowed.)
[OK] button
Closes the Axis Data Input dialog box; the list is added as instructions.
[Cancel] button
Closes the Axis Data Input dialog box without modifying the job.
Axis Input Dialog Box
Item
Description
Radio Button selected in
the Axis Data Input Dialog Box
Pulse/Rectangle
Pulse
Rectangle
S-axis
X-axis
L-axis
Y-axis
U-axis
Z-axis
R-axis
Rx-axis
B-axis
Ry-axis
T-axis
Rz-axis
E-axis
Re-axis
8-axis
HW0483092
8.1 Programming Pendant
Axis Input Dialog Box
Item
Description
[OK] button
Applies the modification, and closes the Axis Input dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the Axis Input dialog box without executing the modification.
Procedure
1. Select either the [Pulse] or [Rectangle] radio button in Axis Data Input dialog box.
2. Edit coordinate values with [Line Insert], [Line Edit], or [Line Delete], and create a list.
If a CSV file already exists, load coordinate values by selecting [CSV File Load].
3. When the list is completed, press [OK] to add the created list as instructions after the
selected line in the job.
The motion type and speed of MOVE instructions which have been added with the input of
NOTE coordinates are the set values specified in Interpolation dialog box displayed by clicking
[MOVE...] in the Job Panel.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
8.2
8.2.1
Monitor
Position Panel
The Position panel displays position data of a robot, and enables robot operation by entering
numerical values in pulses or coordinate units.
To display the Position Panel, on the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [Position
Panel] button.
If the cell contains multiple robots and the "Multiple Robot Dialog" mode is enable, a sepa-
NOTE rate Position panel can be displayed for each robot in the cell. Select the robot to be displayed in the robot combobox of the toolbar before displaying the Position panel.
Robot name.
Specify each axis
value.
Coordinate system
reference frame.
Change the value
with this button.
Set the Step value
for the spin button.
Position Data Panel
Item
Description
[Frame] combobox
The coordinate system reference frame can be selected with the
"Frame" combobox. The choice of frame available in the list may
change depending on the robot configuration.
[Fix TCP] checkbox
When checked, the [Fix TCP] function is enabled. The robot TCP
position remains fixed relative to another model in the cell. Refer to
section " 11.13 Fix TCP " for details.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Position Data Panel
Item
Description
[Set Fix TCP...] button
Displays the "Select Model" dialog to change the model reference
used by the Fix TCP function.
[Configuration] button
Displays the robot "Configuration" dialog to select a different robot
configuration to reach the current position. (Refer to section " 8.3.10
Robot Position Configuration " for details)
[Move Slave] checkbox
When checked, the [Move Slave] function is enabled. When a robot
or station is moved, other slave robots from the same controller are
moved with it so that their TCP maintain the same relative position to
the moved robot or station.
By default all robots are set as slave. The individually setting of each
robot can be changed by pressing the [...] button to display the “Set
Slave Robot” dialog.
Note that when the function is enable, if one of the robot cannot reach
the proper position, all the robots are prevented from moving.
[Close] button
Closes the position data panel.
NOTE The Fix TCP section is not available when the Frame is set to "Work Angle".
Keyboard entry
The value of an axis can be entered directly with the numeric keys. Select the desired axis
edit box, enter the new value, and then press the [Enter] key to update the robot position or
the [Tab] key to move to the next axis.

Pulse
Displays the pulse values of the S, L, U, R, B, T axis of the robot.

Joint
Displays the angular values of the S, L, U, R, B, T axis in angular units (degrees or radians).

Robot
Displays the position (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz) of the robot current Tool frame (TCP) relative to the
Robot frame.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor

Base
Displays the position (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz) of the robot current Tool frame (TCP) relative to the
Base frame. If the robot doesn't have any base axis, the Base frame and Robot frame overlaps each other.

Tool
This frame is useful to move the robot in the Tool coordinate system (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz) but
the displayed values are always "0" even though the robot moves since the reference system
and the Tool coordinate frame are the same.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor

User
Displays the position (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz) of the robot current Tool frame (TCP) relative to the
selected user frame. When selected, a 2nd combobox will appear next to the "Frame" combobox to allow the selection of the user frame number. Only the defined user frame will appear
in the list. At least one user frame need to be define in order to select the User Frame reference system.

Work
Displays the position (X, Y, Z, W, T, C) of the robot current Tool frame (TCP) relative to the set
Work frame. When this coordinate system is selected, the "Set Frame..." button and the
"Reverse Work Side" checkbox will appear under the axis values.
W o rk F ra m e
The Work frame is defined by three components: the frame position (or origin), the travel
direction, and the work surface. The normal of the work surface is set as the Z-axis (red
arrow) and the tool travel direction is set as the X-axis (blue arrow). The Y-axis (green arrow)
will be set perpendicular to the other two axes.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
The Work angle (W) is defined by the angle between the tool and the work surface in the YZ
plane. Changing the value of "W" will rotate the tool around the Work frame X-axis. The "W"
angle is define between -90.0 and 90.0 degrees. The Reverse Work Side checkbox indicates
if the Work Angle is on the same side then the Y-axis (unchecked) or on the opposite side
(checked). If a work angle is moved over the 90.0 degree limit, the work angle side will
change and the work angle will be set back within its allowable limit.
The Travel angle (T), also called the Push/Pull angle, is defined as the angle between the
torch and the YZ plane. When set to 0 degree, the tool is in perpendicular to the travel direction. If "T" is positive, the tool is pushing; and if it is negative, the tool is pulling. The "C" angle
is the rotation angle around the Tool Z axis.

Work Frame Setting
The Work frame can be set manually or automatically. Press the "Set Frame..." button to display the Work Frame Set dialog and set your preferences.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Set Work Frame
Item
Description
"Auto Search" section
Determine which components of the Work frame are to be automatically updated as the robot moves. Settings during teaching
[Teach] and during playback [Play] are independently set.
[Screen Pick Active] check box
Enables the mouse picking operation.Pressing the [Shift] key
enables or disables the "Screen Pick Active" mode.
[Close] button
Closes the dialog box.
[More] or [Less] button
Displays or hides the pick mode setting section.
"Set Value For:" section
Determine which values of the Work Frame will be changed
when the screen is clicked.
"Use Face:" section
Determines which information for a click surface is used to set
the Travel Direction or the Work Surface.
[Normal] radio button:
The normal of the face is used.
[Edge] radio button:
The edge direction closes to the picked point is used.
Note if both the X-axis and the Z-axis are checked, the Zaxis is set in the Edge direction.
[Point] radio button:
The direction defined by the Work frame origin and the
picked face point is used.
The [Reverse Direction] checkbox can be used to select the
opposite direction.
"Pick Object" section
Sets the type of objects that can be selected when clicking on
the screen. Please refer to " 6.4 Pick Settings ".
"Pick Mode" section
Sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked
area. Please refer to " 6.4 Pick Settings ".
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Auto Search
MotoSimEG can automatically set the Work frame by searching from the work surface. The
tool Z-axis positive direction is searched to find the first intersecting face. The found face
intersection point and normal can be used to calculate the frame position and Z-axis. The
travel direction (or Work frame X-axis) can automatically be determined by using the robot
previous position and new position.
Each component of the Work frame can be set to automatically updated as the robot moves or
not. The settings are independently set for "Teach" and "Play" mode. By default the "Auto
Search" is active (checked) for all the components except for the "Travel Direction" in "Teach"
which tends make jogging operation of the robot difficult because the Work frame changes
after each position change.
NOTE
• The Work surface search and calculation can become fairly intensive in cells with large
models made of thousand of faces and will slow down the playback animation. For
such cases, it may necessary to turn off (uncheck) the Work Surface auto search and
manually set the Z-direction.
• When the tool is close to an edge formed by multiple faces, the face with the normal
pointing upward will be selected over the other ones.
• If no surface can be found, the position is set as the tool position and the previously
found normal (Z-axis) is reused.
Manually setting the Work Frame
The Work frame components can be set manually by clicking on the screen. To control the
pick result, press the "More" button to display the Pick Setting section of the dialog. Select the
value to be set and click on the screen to change those values to those of the clicked geometry.
Note that the "Auto Search" - "Teach" check boxes and the "Pick" - "Set Value for" check
boxes are exclusive of one another. By default, only the "Travel Direction" is checked to be
manually set by using the face point information ("Use Face: point"). Therefore, clicking on
the screen will cause travel direction (X-axis) to turn in the work surface plane to point toward
the clicked point.

Fix TCP
The Fix TCP function allows fixing (or attaching) the robot TCP position relative to another
model in the cell. If the robot base or the attached model is moved, the robot changes position so that it TCP remains in the same position relative to the specified model.
The Fix TCP function is enabled by the robot Position panel. Check the "Fix TCP" check box
to enable the function. The default model to which the TCP is attached is the world. To
change the model, press the "Set Fix TCP..." button to display the "Select Model" dialog.
This function is useful to determine the layout of a cell. For example the robot TCP can be
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
attached to a work piece. As the robot base or work piece are moved around during the layout procedure, the robot automatically adjust itself to keep its TCP in the same position on the
work piece. It then becomes obvious if the work piece become out of reach, because robot
will no longer maintain its position on the work piece.
Its can also be used when teaching a robot with external axis. After the tool has been set in
position, if the robot external axis need to be changed, with the Fix TCP function enabled the
robot tool will remains in position. This avoids having to adjust the robot tool after moving the
external axis.
NOTE

The function is automatically disabled if the Position panel is closed or if a job is played
back. The Fix TCP section is not available when the Frame is set to "Work Angle".
Robot Position Configuration
The robot position "Configuration" dialog displays a list of different ways the robot can reach
its current position. To display the "Configuration" dialog, select {Tool} - {Teaching} - {Robot
Configuration} or from the robot "Position" panel click the "Configuration" button.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Configuration Dialog Box
Item
Description
Configuration List
Displays the list of all available robot configurations in which the
robot can reach the current position. Changing the selected configuration will move the robot into the specified configuration. The asterisk next to the index number indicates the initial configuration of the
robot.
[OK] button
Closes the Configuration dialog and changes the robot configuration
to the select one.
[Cancel] button
Closes the Configuration dialog and returns the robot to its initial
configuration.
A robot can often reach the same position in different ways. The robot resulting pulse position
will be different but the tool will be at same position (XYZ position). The robot configuration is
used to differentiate between those possibilities.
The configuration is define by six parameters:
FRONT or REAR
Specifies if the B-axis rotation center is in the FRONT or the
REAR of the S-axis rotation center.
UP or DOWN
Specifies if the elbow of the robot (angle between the lower
and upper arm) is UP or DOWN.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
FLIP or NO FLIP
YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100
: B-axis position
Specifies if the angle of the B-axis is to be positive or
negative.
FLIP: B-axis angle is greater or equal to 0°
NO FLIP: B-axis angle is small than 0°
NX100 : R-axis position
Specifies if the R axis is FLIP or NOFLIP. FLIP position indicates an angle from -90° to 90°, 270° to 360°,
or -360° to -270°.
S<180 or S>=180
Specifies if the S-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°
(within one turn) or greater (over one turn).
R<180 or R>=180
Specifies if the R-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°
(within one turn range) or greater (over one turn range).
T<180 or T>=180
Specifies if the S-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°
(within one turn range) or greater (over one turn range).
Example:
FRONT,UP,FLIP,S<180,R<180,T<180
8.2.2
REAR,DOWN,FLIP,S<180,R<180,T>=180
I/O
I/O setting and monitoring are enabled by commands under {I/O} command: select {Tool} {Monitor} - {I/O} for the following operations:
If the cell contains multiple robots and the "Multiple Robot Dialog" mode is enable, a sepa-
NOTE rate I/O Monitor can be displayed for each robot in the cell. Select the robot to be displayed in the robot combobox of the toolbar before displaying the I/O Monitor.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor

I/O Monitor
I/O Monitor can display signals from an instruction and also give signals to the robot by selecting an IN signal before or during playback.
To display the I/O Monitor dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the
[I/O Monitor] button.
Specifies the I/O signal
group No. to be displayed.
I/O Monitor Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Set all IN-Signal] check box
Turns ON all the IN signals of all registered robots. Uncheck
the box to turn OFF all the IN signals.
[Set all OT-Signal] check box
Turns ON all the OUT signals of all registered robots. Uncheck
the box to turn OFF all the OUT signals.
[Clear I/O] button
Clears all the signals of the selected robot.
[Save I/O] button
The I/O data specified in I/O Monitor is saved.
[Load I/O] button
The saved I/O data is loaded to I/O Monitor.
[Close] button
Closes I/O Monitor dialog box.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor

Sequencer Connection Setting
MotoSim EG uses a STAGE object as sequencer function to exchange I/O signals between
robots: the I/O check between robots is enabled with this function.
To display the Connection Setting dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [I/O Settings]
group, click the [Connection Setting] button.
Definition of connection between the
robot and the sequencer (IOMAP).
Definition of the connection
in the sequencer (Connection).
Displays terminal information.
If there is no definition of the terminal,
displays "No Information" in the box.
Connection Setting Dialog Box
Item
Description
[OK] button
Applies the modifications on the connection setting, and closes the
dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without applying the modifications.
Procedure
1. Select [Add] in the "IOMAP" section to display the IOMAP Editor dialog box, and define
the connection between the robot and the sequencer entering the robot name,
I/O type, and the I/O number and terminal number for the sequencer. Press [OK].
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
(d) Terminal number
(a) Robot name
(b) I/O type
(c) I/O number
To connect the OUT-1 of the robot R1 to the terminal 1, set:
(a) R1; (b) OT; (c) 1; (d) 1.
To connect the IN-1 of the robot R1 to the terminal 21, set:
(a) R1; (b) IN; (c) 1; (d) 21.
It is also possible to connect in group unit.
To connect the OUT1-8 to terminal 1-8, set:
(a) R1; (b) OG; (c) 1; (d) 1.
2. Select [Add] in the "Connection List" section to display Connection Editor dialog box,
and define the connection in the sequencer.
Setting without Logical Expression
Enter the terminal numbers for the Robot Input and the Robot Output. Specify the
starting delay timer, then press [OK].
(a) Robot input
(c) Starting delay timer
(b) Robot output
e.g.
To delay the T9 sequencer output signal (to the robot input) for 2 seconds after
receiving the T17 sequencer input signal (from a robot output), set:
(a) 9; (b) 17; (c) 2.00.
In this case, the result terminal (sequencer output) must be connected to the IN signal of
NOTE the robot.
Be aware that the connection of the result terminal to the OUT signal of the robot may
cause damage to the logic, resulting in an I/O simulation failure.
Setting with Logical Expression
i) Click on [Exp.>>] to display the “Logical Equation” section.
ii) Enter in the "Sequencer Terminal: T" edit box the terminal number to which
the result of the logical arithmetic expression is to be assigned, the item (b)
in the figure below.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
iii) Enter the logical arithmetic expression in the edit box (c): the supported
operators are listed as follows:
+
Represents OR (U).
*
Represents AND (
!
Represents NOT: applied in case of using the contact point B (STR-NOT).
).
()
Represents parenthesis.
T
Represents terminal.
iv) Set the delay time in TIMER edit box (d) if the result of (c) is to be assigned
to (b) with a certain time delay.
(a) Displays the Logical
Equation section.
(b) Terminal number to which the result
of the arithmetic expression is assigned.
(d) Delay timer.
(c) Logical arithmetic expression.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
3. Press [OK] on the Connection Setting dialog box when the setting is completed.
NOTE In the "Connection List" section, the checkbox on the left of each connection can be
unchecked to disable the connection.
Example of Logical Expression
T2
T1
T3
T2
T2
Logical expression: T1 = T2 + T3
Explanation: Terminal 1 turns ON when
either terminal 2 or 3 is ON.
T1
Logical expression: T1 = T2 * T3
Explanation: Terminal 1 turns ON when
both terminal 2 and 3 are ON.
T1
Logical expression: T1 = ! T2 * T3
Explanation: Terminal 1 turns ON when
terminal 2 is OFF and
terminal 3 is ON.
T3
T3
• This function does not check for duplication when defining IOMAP.
NOTE • The instructions currently supported are as follows:
DOUT OT#(1)=1
DOUT OG#(1)=3
WAIT IN#(1)=1
WAIT IN#(1)=1 T=20.0
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
8.2.3
Variable Monitor
Displaying and editing the robots are enabled by setting the Variable Monitor.
To display the Variable Monitor dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click
the [Variable Monitor] button.
Variable Monitor
Item
Description
Displays the Variable Property dialog box to set the variables to be displayed and edited.
When setting a position variable (such as P, BP, EX variables), be sure to
specify the frame (coordinate) in the FRAME combo box.
Setting of FRAME:
Variable P: When "USER" has been selected, set the user
coordinate number in the [UF#] box.
Variable BP: Enabled only when "PULSE" or "BASE" is
selected.
Variable EX: Enabled only when "PULSE" is selected.
[Add(A)] button
[Mod(M)] button
Displays the Variable Property dialog box to modify the variables.
If "PULSE" is selected in the FRAME combo box when a position variable
(such as P, BP, EX variables) is selected in the Name combo box,
no selection can be made in the .TYPE. section.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Variable Monitor
Item
Description
[Del(D)] button
Deletes the selected variables.
[Clear(L)] button
Deletes all the variables displayed in the Variable Monitor window.
[Close(C)] button
Closes the Variable Monitor window.
8.2.4
Lap Time Panel
The Lap Time Panel dialog box shows playback time of a specified section or the number of
stroke per minute (spm).
To display the Lap Time Panel dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click
the [Lap Time Panel] button.
Procedure
1. Enter the following command at the point where the lap time count is to be started.
(Note that the command has to be entered before the start point as shown in the figure
below at “(a)”.)
‘RPT:LAP=START
2. Enter the following command at the point where the lap time count is to be stopped.
(Note that the command has to be entered after the end point as shown in the figure
below at “(b)”.)
‘RPT:LAP=STOP
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
(a) Comment to start the
Lap Time count.
(b) Comment to stop the
Lap Time count.
3. Select "Lap Time Panel" in the Panel selection box to display the Lap Time Panel dialog box.
Controller List
Playback time of specified interval,
OR
Time number of stroke per minute
(spm)
4. Play back the job.
NOTE Robots cannot be selected during the playback.
5. After the playback, the Lap Time Panel dialog box shows the playback time between
two points specified in steps 1 and 2 above, or the number of stroke per minute (spm)
of the currently selected robot.
To display the lap time of each robot, change the robot selection in the robot list.
6. Press
to reset the value to zero in the Lap Time Panel dialog box.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
8.2.5
Pulse Recorder
When playback is performed with the Pulse Recorder dialog box displayed on the screen, the
pulse positions of the specified robot is displayed in the dialog box at every screen refresh.
Model operation instruction can also be recorded by checking the "Hide See Model (MDL
instructions) checkbox.
When moving the cursor in the displayed list of data, if the selected data line contains pulse
information, the robots are moved to the specified pulse positions; if it contains a model
instruction, the specified model operation is executed.
To display the Pulse Recorder dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click
the [Pulse Record] button.
Pulse Recorder Dialog Box
Item
Description
Moves the cursor to the first data line and executes it.
Move the cursor to the previous data line and executes the line.
Continuously executes the data line in the pulse record from the
cursor current position to the end of the list or until stopped.
Stops the continuous execution of the data lines started by pressing the
button.
Moves the cursor to the next data line and executes the line.
Moves the cursor to the last data line and executes it.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Pulse Recorder Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Copy] button
Copies all the data lines to the clipboard.
[Delete] button
Deletes the data line where the cursor is located.
[Reset] button
Deletes the all the data lines.
[Load] button
Retrieves the previously saved data lines from a text file (.txt).
[Save]button
Stores all the data lines in a text file (.txt).
[Close]button
Closes the Pulse Recorder.
NOTE Same buttons in the Pulse Recorder dialog box can only be used after the job has been
played back.
8.2.6
Step Interval Time Panel
When playback with the Step Interval Time dialog box, the tact time of every step are shown.
When a cursor moves to an indicated list after playback completion, a robot moves to the
teaching point.
To display the Step Interval Time dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group,
click the [Step Interval Time Panel] button.
Playback Time (Total)
Playback Time
Job Name
Step Number
Move Time
Move time (Total)
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Step Interval Time Dialog Box
Item
Description
Stores the content of the list on the clipboard.
Selects whether to paste data into the text document or Excel
spread sheet in COPY Option dialog box.
[Copy] button
8.2.7
Trace
Trace is a function to display update points of the robot position when the robot playback is
performed.
To display the Trace Manager dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click
the [Trace] button.

Trace Manager
Multiple traces can be set.
When a controller is registered to the cell a trace is automatically added for Tool Center Point
(TCP) of each robot.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
Item
Description
Trace list
Displays the information of the defined traces.
Trace Model: Name of the trace model (used in the CadTree)
Enable: Enable/Disable the trace generation during playback.
Length: Approximate travel distance of the traced point during
playback.
Time:
Playback Time
Keep TraceLine: In the case of Disable, the trace lines is deleted
automatically before the playback is started.
The “Trace Property” of a trace can be displayed by double-clicling on
a trace from the list.
[Edit] button
Edits a trace with the “Trace Property” dialog.
For details refer to section " 8.2.7 Trace ".
[Add] button
Defines a new trace with the “Trace Property” dialog.
For details refer to section " 8.2.7 Trace ".
[Delete] button
Deletes the trace definition currently selected in the trace list.
[Clipboard] button
Opens the “Trace Copy” dialogs with the data of the trace currently
selected in the list.
For details refer to section " 8.2.7 Trace ".
[Clear Model] button
Deletes all the trace models.
Note that before playback, all the previously generated trace models
are automatically deleted.
[Clear TraceLine]
button
Delete all the trace lines.
Save the trace lines as the model file.
The trace is not saved on the cell. When it needs that the
[Save TraceLine]
button
[Close] button

NOTE trace is saved, the trace is saved by [Save TraceLine],
and save the cell.
Closes the “Trace Manager” dialog box.
Trace Properties
The “Trace Property” dialog box is displayed by pressing the [Edit] or [Add] button of the
“Trace Manager” dialog box.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor
It allows to set the trace properties such as the color, number of points, traced model, etc.
“Trace Property” Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Enable]
Indicates that the trace will be generated during playback when
checked.
[Robot]
Selects the robot associated with the trace.
A trace point is generated everytime the robot position is updated during playback.
This field cannot be modified when editing an existing trace.
[Model]
Displays the name of the model that will be traced.
The default model is the robot TCP.
To change model, press the [...] button beside the “Model” field to display the “Select Model” dialog box. Select a model and press [OK].
[Parent]
Displays the name of the model that is used as the parent of the trace
and as a coordinated system for the trace point.
The default model is the “world” model.
To change model, press the [...] button beside the “Parent” field to display the “Select Model” dialog box. Select a model and press [OK].
[Keep TraceLine]
When this item is checked, the trace lines before playback is not
deleted and the playback is started.
[Max Points]
Defines the maximum number of data points that are generates in the
trace model. The value may be increase up to 20 000 points. When
the maximum value is reached, the oldest points are erased as new
points are generates.
[Color]
Displays the color of the trace model.
To change the color, press the [...] button beside the “Color” field to
display the “Color” dialog box. Select a color and press [OK].
[Line Type]
Selects the line type: dotted, normal, thick.
[OK] button
If in [Add] mode: adds a new trace definition.
If in [Edit] mode: updates the selected trace definition.
Closes the “Trace Property” dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the “Trace Property” dialog box.
HW0483092
8.2 Monitor

Trace Copy
The “Trace Copy” dialog box is displayed by pressing the [Clipboard] button of the “Trace
Manager” dialog box.
It allows to copy the last playback data points of the selected trace to the clipboard or a text
file.
The displayed trace data are "Controller Name", "Robot Name", "Model Traced", "Trace
Model", and "Reference". Then, the values of position and speed at each trace points are displayed.
“Trace Copy” Dialog Box
Item
Description
[File] button
Saves the displayed trace information to a text file.
[Clipboard] button
Copies the displayed trace information to the clipboard.
[Close] button
Closes the “Trace Copy” dialog box.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
8.3
8.3.1
Teaching
OLP
OLP is a teaching tool that simplifies the robot teaching by moving the robot to an target position.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button, the [OLP] dialog appears.
For the details on how to use OLP, refer to " 11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function ".
Name of the
operation object
Use the [Shift] key
to toggle the “Pick
Enable” checkbox
Item
[OLP Pick] check box
Description
To be selected whenever OLP is used.
The check box is automatically cleared when another function is
selected to operate the robot.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
Item
“Move Mode” section
Description
Determines the method to move to the target point.
[Position] check box:
The Operation Object is moved to the position (XYZ) of the target
point.
[Orientation] check box:
The Operation Object is turned to match the orientation (Rx, Ry,
Rz) of the target point frame.
[Z-Axis] check box:
The Operation Object is turned so that its Z-axis matches the Zaxis of the target point frame.
[Use Face] section:
This setting is enable with [Orientation] or [Z-Axis] mode. It can
be use to change the direction of the Z-Axis when selecting a
face.
[Normal] radio button:
The Z-axis is in the same direction as the face normal.
[Reverse] radio button:
The Z-axis is in the opposite direction of the face normal.
If only the orientation is to be changed without
NOTE changing the position, uncheck the [Position]
checkbox before clicking any point.
“Pick Mode” section
Sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked area.
[Free] check box:
Point of the model at the clicked position.
[Vertex] check box:
Nearest vertex from the clicked position.
[Center] check box:
Center of the nearest face or edge from the clicked position.
[Edge] check box:
Nearest edge point from the clicked position.
“Pick Object” section
Sets the type of the object to be selected when clicking on the cell
view. (Multiple items can be selected)
[Model] check box:
Solid models.
[Frame] check box:
Model frame or AXIS6 models.
[Lines & Inters] check box:
Lines such as LINE part, WORK line and wireframe model, and
intersection lines generated by the intersection of parts or models.
[Point] check box:
Points such as TRACE points.
[Floor] check box:
FLOOR parts.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
Item
Description
Selects an object to be moved to the target point.
[Robot TCP] radio button:
-Sets the robot TCP as the object to move.To select the robot,
please refer to section " 7.2.3 Robot Selection ".
[Move Slave] checkbox:
- When checked, the [Move Slave] function is enabled. When a
robot or station is moved, other slave robots from the same controller are moved with it so that their TCP maintain the same relative position to the moved robot or station.
By default all robots are set as slave. The individually setting of
each robot can be changed by pressing the [...] button to display
the “Set Slave Robot” dialog.
[Teacher] radio button:
-Sets the “Teacher” coordinate axis as the object to move.
[Model] radio button:
-Sets the selected model as the object to move.
Model can be selected with
or {Screen} - {Model} - {SelectModel} or the [CADTree].
[XYZ] button:
-Displays the position data panel as shown below to manually
modify the position or orientation of the operation object.
“Operation Obj” section
Position dialog
Teacher dialog
NOTE Refer to the dialog title bar to confirm the operation
object name.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
Item

Description
“Move to External Ref.
Point” section
TUse to move the part held by the robot to a specific point (External
Reference Point).
[Active] check box:
- When check the robot will move the point clicked on the model it
is holding to the defined external reference.
[Select Reference] button:
Displays the Select Model dialog to select a model (frame) as the
external reference point.
"Synchronous Move of
Base Axis" section
Use to move the base axis (servotrack) at the same time as the robot
when moving to a target point.
[Active] check box:
- When check the base axis will move according the set method to
enable the robot to reach the target point.
[Method...] button
-Specifies the method to move the base axis.
OLP Function Pick Method and Display
When the mouse pointer is over the cell view, press down the left mouse button. The model
considered for selection will display in yellow with a red dot to indicate the specific point location. In the case of a solid model, the border (edges) of the pick face will be highlighted in
green. The display will update to represent change of selection as the mouse pointer is
moved over different models. The actual selection is made only when the mouse button is
released.
Pick Point
The pick point display will change depending on the selected move mode.
Position
Displays a point.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching

Orientation
Displays a frame (Z-axis is in red).
Z-axis
Display an arrow (Z-Axis).
Selecting [Position] in the "Move Mode" section: (Other items set at
default)
The robot moves so that the robot TCP overlaps with any clicked point.
Note that this motion does not involve any change in the wrist posture.
Click

Selecting [Position] and [Orientation] in the "Move Mode" section:
(Other items set at default)
The robot moves changing its wrist's posture so that the frame of the robot TCP overlaps the
frame of the clicked point.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
Click

Selecting "Move to External Reference Point"
Click a point on a model carried by the robot and the robot will move to bring that point to the
reference point. (The reference point needs to have been set before this operation can be
used.)
Reference Model
Click

Selecting [CurModel] in the "Operation Object" section
Click a point and the currently selected model will be move to the click location. The name of
the current model is displayed in the OLP dialog title bar.
Click
Current Model
NOTE For more details on the OLP operation, please refer to section " 11.1 Teaching Using
OLP Function "
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
8.3.2
Job Editing Function
Job Editor (or Job EditorNX or Job EditorDX or Job EditorFS or Job EditorDX200) is available
depending on the type of the selected robot: it is an optional application that enables instruction-editing operation as accurately as the actual controller.
To use the Job Editor functions, on the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the
[Execute JobEditor] button.
The contents of the Programming Pendant dialog box (in paragraph 8.1.1) and the Job Panel
(in paragraph 8.1.2) are updated when Job Editor is terminated after editing the jobs.
NOTE
• To use this function, it is necessary to install the separate applications Job Editor
YRC1000 (for YRC1000) or Job EditorDX200 (for DX200) , Job EditorDX (for DX100),
Job EditorFS (for FS100), Job EditorNX (for NX100) , Job Editor (for XRC). (Refer to the
list below.)
• While Job Editor is running, MotoSim EG can not be operated.
Type of Selected Robot
Applicable Job Editing Application Name
Robot operated with YRC1000
Job EditorYRC1000
Robot operated with DX200
Job EditorDX200
Robot operated with DX100
Job EditorDX
Robot operated with FS100
Job EditorFS
Robot operated with NX100
Job EditorNX
Robot operated with XRC
Job Editor
Robot operated with MRC, MRC II, or ERC
N/A
8.3.3
Job Shift
Parallel Shift is a function which enables multiple taught positions of a job to be shifted at the
same time. The commands subject to this function are MOVJ, MOVL, MOVC, MOVS and
REFP.
The teaching positions and motion paths of all the MOV commands are displayed in the Parallel Shift dialog box, and only the teaching position is displayed for REFP (reference point)
commands. The dialog box displays the motion paths before shifting in green color and the
motion paths after shifting in dark blue color.
To display the Job Shift dialog box, on the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
the [Job Shift] button.
NOTE
• The commands after the shift remain the same, and only the positions are changed;
there will be no change in interpolation, speed, etc.
• The assumed image after the shift will be re-drawn each time the shift amount is
updated.
Path after
shifting
Path before
shifting
Parallel Shift Dialog Box
Item
Description
“Frame” section
Performs the Parallel Shift operation in the selected coordinate system. When the User frame is selected, select the user frame number.
“Shift Value” section
"X", "Y", "Z" spin boxes
Sets the shifting amount of each axis direction in millimeter.
Directly enter the value or specify the value with each spin button
Unit(mm) spin box
Sets the shift unit for the spin button.
Directly enter the value or specify the value with spin button
.
The value can be set between 1 to 1000 mm.
[Base Axis Move]
check box
Calculates the shift amount using the robot axis after moving the robot
with a servotrack.
Enabled only for a robot with a servotrack.
[Same Point Posture
Change] check box
Rx, Ry and Rz are treated not as shift quantity for not specified coordinates by "Shift Value" section but posture changing.
HW0483092
.
8.3 Teaching
Parallel Shift Dialog Box
Item

Description
“Steps to Shift” section
[All] radio button
Selects all the steps to which a shift may be applied in the job.
[Select] radio button
Selects the steps to which a shift may be applied in the selected
range.
[Apply] button
Writes the shift result to the job. After applying the shift, the shift value
in the Job Shift dialog box is reset to zero.
[Close] button
Closes the Job Shift dialog box.
The shift value is discarded if [Apply] is not clicked.
Limitation of Job Shift
• Shifting out of the range of motion:
If the position after the shift operation is out of the range of motion, the position out of the
range of motion will be displayed in red.
Shifting to Y=500.0 results in position out of
the range of motion; therefore, the previous
shifting result is displayed (6: displayed in red).
• If any of the following are performed during the Parallel Shift operation, the shift value in
the Parallel Shift dialog box is reset to zero:
a) Operations of the dialog box during the Parallel Shift.
• Modifying the setting in the "FRAME" section.
• Modifying the setting in the "Steps to Shift" section.
• Modifying the setting of the [Base Axis Move] check box.
b) Job operations during the Parallel Shift
• Modifying the job contents with another function
• Modifying the current job
• Executing a job that calls other jobs
• Teaching Sheet function disabled during Parallel Shift:
The Parallel Shift uses the Teaching Sheet function. Therefore, the Teaching Sheet func-
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
tion in the {Robot} menu is unavailable while the Parallel Shift function is being used.
• Soft limit when servotrack moves:
When the [Base Axis Move] check box is selected for a robot operating with a servotrack,
the servotrack motion cannot exceed its soft limit settings.
8.3.4
Paint Setting
The Paint Setting function allows to display the spray model when the SPYON or SPYOF
instruction is executed in playback operation.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Settings] group, click the [Paint Setting] button, the [Paint
Panel] dialog appears.
PAINT Panel Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Gun No.] spin box
(1 to 3)
Paint gun number.
[Tool No.] spin box
Specifies the tool number to set the paint gun number.
"(a)TCP distance"
edit box
Distance from the paint spray outlet (nozzle).
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
PAINT Panel Dialog Box
Item
Description
"(b)Valid distance"
edit box
Effective range to apply paint from the nozzle.
"(c)Max Diameter"
edit box
Maximum width of the paint spray face.
"(d)Mini Diameter"
edit box
Minimum width of the paint spray face.
"(e)Nozzle Position"
edit boxes
Nozzle position viewed from the flange.
"(e)Nozzle Posture"
edit boxes
Nozzle posture viewed from the flange.
[TCP calculation]
check box
Automatically calculates tool dimensions according to the input information.
[Transparent] check box
Displays paint model in translucent color.
"Model division"
combo box
Number of divided paint spray faces.
[TCP distance] button
Paint color from nozzle to TCP.
[Valid distance] button
Paint color from nozzle to the end of the valid painting distance.
[Display model]
check box
Displays the created spray model.
Procedure
1. Select a robot for the spray model setting.
2. Select {Tool} - {Teaching} - {Paint Setting...} to specify each item in the Paint Panel dialog box.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
8.3.5
Four Point Teaching
The Four Point Teaching function automatically generates rectangular tracks from four taught points previously selected.
Passes in the interim of the rectangular track are generated by
specifying the first point, paint count, and pass count.
To use this function, on the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the [Four Point Teaching] button.
P1
1
2
P2
4
3
Example 1) Paint Count = 1; Pass Count 1 = 6; Circular = OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
11
Pass Pitch 1: P2/(6-1)
Example 2) Paint Count = 1; Pass Count 1 = 6; Circular = ON.
1
2
3
5
6
7
11
12
13
17
Pass Pitch 1: P2/(6-1)
4
8
9
10
14
15
16
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
Example 3) Paint Count = 2; Pass Count 1 = 6; Pass Count 2 = 5; Circular = OFF.
13
14
17
18
21
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
7
9
10
12
11
15
16
19
Pass Pitch 1: P2/(6-1)
Pass Pitch 2: P1/(5-1)
20
Procedure
1. Select the first point of four consecutive points in the displayed job.
NOTE • The lines other than MOVE instructions are not allowed between the four points.
• In the above example, the lines C0007 to C0009 cannot be specified as the first point.
2. Enter the speed for the four point teaching.
(The speed of the second point of the original values is displayed as the initial value.)
3. Specify the Paint Count edit box.
Setting range of the value is 1 to 99; the initial value is 1. (If 5 or above is set, the same
area is to be painted again.)
4. Set the Pass Count edit boxes as follows:
Setting range: 1 to 99.
If the Paint Count is 1, “P2” cannot be set.
The initial value is calculated from the selected four points and the value of the initial
Pass Pitch.
When the Paint Count is odd, the value set in “P1” is used.
When the Paint Count is even, the value set in “P2” is used.
5. Set the circular interpolation as follows:
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
When the Paint Count is odd, circular interpolation is used if the [ON] check box
on the “P1” side is checked.
When the Paint Count is even, circular interpolation is used if the [ON] check box
on the “P2” side is checked.
6. Press the [OK] button.
A confirmation dialog box appears; select [Yes] to generate the MOVE instructions
according to the information set in the steps 2 to 6 above.
NOTE Be aware that once the [Yes] button is selected, the job after the Four Point development
cannot easily be restored (e.g. deletion of instructions, etc.) to its initial state.
The Four Point Teaching dialog box before the Four Point development
(C0000 is selected, and 7 is entered in the Pass Count.)
The Four Point Teaching dialog box after the Four Point development
(The generated instruction lines C0000 to C0013 are developed.)
7. Press [Close] button.
Confirm each point of the generated jobs.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
NOTE The Pass Pitch cannot be specified directly: the Pass Pitch box shows the value calculated from the selected four points and the Pass Count.
8.3.6
Tool Renew
The Tool Renew function allows the taught job to be converted to the same control point even
if different tool files (TOOL.CND) are used.
To use this function, on the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the [Tool
Update] button.
The selected tool file
Job list
NOTE This function overwrites tool files and job files. Make sure to backup the tool files and job
files before performing this operation.
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press [Browse] button and select the tool file.
From the JOB List, select the job to be converted. (Multiple jobs can be selected.)
Click on [OK].
Confirm the job.
The conversion will not be executed if the robot posture is changed significantly or the
position is out of the range of motion due to the tool change. If the conversion cannot
be executed normally, the message " 'Next Cannot be Converted!! " appears in the line
before the MOVE instruction.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
8.3.7
Auto Place
The Auto Place function automatically searches a point to position the robot from a job or
“Auto Place File” (.txt). It also allows to create a job with minimum cycle time from the search
result.
To use this function, on the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the [Auto
Place] button.
Auto Place Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Add] button
Adds the taught points selected with the OLP function to the Select
Teach list box.
[Check] button
Verifies the range of motion of each taught point in the Select Teach list
box. Indicates "NG" if the taught point is out of the range of motion.
[Job...] button
Displays the “Making JOB” dialog box. For details, refer to the step 4
of the Procedure below.
[Search] button
Searches for all the available points within the search range; displays
the results on the list box of the “Search Location” section, creating
auto place model files.
[Del] button
Deletes the item selected in the “Search Location” list box. (Multiple
selection is not allowed.)
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
Commands in the Menu
{File}
{File} Pull-Down Menu
Item
Description
{Open}
Selects “Auto Place File” (.txt), and lists the Axis6 model data read
from the file.
{Save}
Stores the listed Axis6 model data in the Auto Place File (.txt).
{Edit File}
Opens and edits the Auto Place File in Notepad.
{Exit}
Ends the Auto Place function.
{Edit}
{Edit} Pull-Down Menu
Item
{Copy Search Location}
{Teach}
Description
Stores the search results in the list box of the “Search Location” section in the clipboard.
{Teach} Pull-Down Menu
Item
Description
{Add}
Adds the taught points selected with the OLP function to the “Select
Teach” list box.
For the details of the OLP function, refer to " 8.3.1 OLP ".
{Delete a Point}
Deletes the item selected in the “Select Teach” list box. (Multiple
selection is not allowed.)
{Delete all Points}
Deletes all the items in the “Select Teach” list box.
{Load from JOB}
Reads the taught points from the selected job, and displays them on
the “Select Teach” list box.
{Check Reach}
Verifies the range of motion of the selected taught point in the “Select
Teach” list box. Indicates "NG" if the taught point is out of the range of
motion.
{Making Job}
Displays the Making JOB dialog box. For details, refer to the step 4 of
the Procedure below.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
{Location}
Item
{Search Start}
{Location} Pull-Down Menu
Description
Searches for all the available points within the search range; displays
the results on the list box of the “Search Location” section, and creates
an auto place model file.
Specifies the search range in the Search Area Def dialog box.
{Search Area Def}
{Load from Mode File}
Reads the location points from the auto place model file, and displays
them on the “Search Location” list box.
{Delete a Location}
Deletes the item selected in the “Search Location” list box. (Multiple
selection is not allowed.)
{Delete all Locations}
Deletes all the items in the “Search Location” list box.
{Quick Cycle Time}
{Start}
Starts the quick cycle time operation.
{Stop}
Ends the quick cycle time operation.
{Define INF File}
Selects an INF file to perform the quick cycle time operation.
Procedure
1. Select {Teach} - {Load from JOB} to select a job, and display the list of Axis6 models of
the selected job on the Select Teach list box as shown in the following figure.
(At this point, select a simple job such as the one with MOVL and MOVJ instructions.
The one with CALL, JUMP, or WAIT instruction should not be selected.)
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
2. Specifies the search range in the Search Area Def dialog box.
3. Press [Search] to start searching the location points.
The location points Axis6 models are listed as follows.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
4. Select an arbitrary point from the Search Location list box, and display the following
dialog box to create a job by selecting {Teach} - {Making Job}.
Specify whether to create a new
job or select an existing job.
Enter the job name.
Proceeds to the
next dialog box.
Converts the INF file
into the JBI file.
Press here to edit the
converted JBI file in
Notepad.
Press here to edit
the INF file in Notepad.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
8.3.8
Step Motion
The Step Motion function enables to check a robot motion moving between the specified
steps.
To use this function, on the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the [Step
Motion] button.
Set the line where the job execation starts.
Set the line where the job execation ends.
Controls the animation speed.
Move the slide toward the left to slow down
the animation speed.
[Reset] : Moves to the "START" line.
[Play] : Excutes jobs from the "START" to
"END" line.
[Stop] : Stop the job under execation.
Procedure
1. Select {Robot} - {Controller} - {Select Job}, or click on
to select a job for the Step
Motion operation.
2. Set the range by selecting a line in the job display area and pressing either “Set START
line“ or “Set END line“ button.
3. Press [Play] button to execute the job and confirm the robot motion.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
8.3.9
Teaching Sheet
Teaching Sheet is a function to number every teaching point and display a figure drawn by
connecting each point with straight lines on the cell window.

Create, Delete, and Break
On the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Sheet] group, click the [Create] button, [Delete] button, or
[Stop] button to create, delete or cancel the teaching sheet.

Color Setting
On the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Sheet] group, click the [Setting] button, and select [Move
Dependent], or [User Defined].
When select Move Dependent, the color changes depending on the type of MOVE instruction;
Whne select User Defined, the color is specified color.

With Motion
On the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Sheet] group, click the [Setting] button, and select [With
Motion] to move the robot as the teaching sheet is being drawn.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
8.3.10
Robot Position Configuration
The robot position "Configuration" dialog displays a list of different ways the robot can reach
its current position. To display the "Configuration" dialog, click the "Configuration" button of the
"Position" panel.
Configuration Dialog Box
Item
Description
Configuration List
Displays the list of all available robot configurations in which the
robot can reach the current position. Changing the selected configuration will move the robot into the specified configuration. The asterisk next to the index number indicates the initial configuration of the
robot.
[OK] button
Closes the Configuration dialog and changes the robot configuration
to the select one.
[Cancel] button
Closes the Configuration dialog and returns the robot to its initial
configuration.
A robot can often reach the same position in different ways. The robot resulting pulse position
will be different but the tool will be at same position (XYZ position). The robot configuration is
used to differentiate between those possibilities.
The configuration is define by six parameters:
FRONT or REAR
Specifies if the B-axis rotation center is in the FRONT or the
REAR of the S-axis rotation center.
UP or DOWN
Specifies if the elbow of the robot (angle between the lower
and upper arm) is UP or DOWN.
HW0483092
8.3 Teaching
FLIP or NO FLIP
Specifies if the R axis is FLIP or NOFLIP. FLIP position indicates an angle from -90° to 90°, 270° to 360°, or -360° to 270°.
S<180 or S>=180
Specifies if the S-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°
(within one turn) or greater (over one turn).
R<180 or R>=180
Specifies if the R-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°
(within one turn range) or greater (over one turn range).
T<180 or T>=180
Specifies if the S-axis absolute angle is smaller then 180°
(within one turn range) or greater (over one turn range).
Example:
FRONT,UP,FLIP,S<180,R<180,T<180
REAR,DOWN,FLIP,S<180,R<180,T<180
HW0483092
8.4 Create Model from Job
8.4
Create Model from Job
The "Create Model from Job” allows the creation of a taught point model (AXIS6 model) for a
specified job.
Creation of teaching
point models
A taught point model (model AXIS6)
Procedure
1. On the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the [SaveJob Model] button
to display the [Create Model from Job] dialog box.
2. Select a robot and then a job from the job list of that robot.
Change the model properties in the model section as required.
3. Press the [Create] button to generate a model for the selected job.
If models for other jobs need to be created, repeat the previous steps.
4. When done, press the [Close] button to close the dialog.
HW0483092
8.4 Create Model from Job
Create Model from Job Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Robot] combobox
Selects a robot in the cell.
Job List
Displays the list of job available for the selected robot. Select the
job for which a model will be created.
“Model” section
[Name]
Displays the name of the model that will appear in the Cad Tree.
The default name will be: <robotname>-<jobname>-JBIThe
model name can be change by typing a new name in the model
name box.
[File]
Displays the model file name. The model file is created in the
robot folder with the name of the job and the extension ".MDL"
[Parent]
Displays the model parent name. The default parent is the
"world" model. The parent can be changed by pressing the [...]
button and selecting a different parent from the "Select Parent
Model" dialog.
[Color]
Displays the model color. The default color is black. The color
can be changed by pressing the [...] button and selecting a different color from the Color dialog box.
[Create] button
Creates a point model for the selected job.
[Close] button
Closes the dialog box.
HW0483092
8.5 Update Job from Model
8.5
Update Job from Model
The “Update Job from Mode”} allows updating the taught positions of a job with the points of a
model (AXIS6).
Original job
Update job
from model
Part and AXIS6 models were moved.
Updated job
Procedure
1. On the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the [Update Job from Model]
button to display the [Update Job from Model] dialog box.
2. Select a robot and then a model from the model list of that robot. The associated files
information will display in the "Details" section. The "Output Job" name can be modified as required.
3. Press the [Update] button to update the Output Job with the selected model point
(AXIS6) data. If other jobs need to be updated select the associated model for that
other job, repeat the previous steps.
4. When done, press the [Close] button to close the dialog.
HW0483092
8.5 Update Job from Model
Update Job from Model Dialog Box
Item
Description
[Robot] combobox
Selects a robot in the cell.
Model List
Displays the models with associated job files for the specified robot.
Select the model from which the job should be
updated.
To be able to update a job a corresponding model file
NOTE (.MDL) with the job name must be located in the
robot folder. A model in the CADtree must then
make reference to that job model file in order to be
displayed in the model list.
“Details” section
[Model File]
Name of the model file located in the selected robot folder.
[Source Job]
Name of the job file that will be used as a template for the
updated job.
[Points]
Displays the number of points in the model and the number of
steps in the job. For best result, both amount should be equal.
[Output Job]
Name of the job the resulting job updated with the model point
(AXIS6) data. By default, this Output Job has the same name as
the Source Job. Inputted name it must be a valid job name.
[Update] button
Updates the Output Job with the model point (AXIS6) data.
[Close] button
Closes the dialog box.
HW0483092
8.5 Update Job from Model

Copying Jobs Between Robots
Job can also be copied to another robot and then updated.
1. Create a model for the job with the "Create Model from Job" dialog. (See section " 8.4
Create Model from Job " for details).
2. Copy the job (.JBI) and model (.MDL) files from source robot folder to another destination
robot folder (using Windows Explorer or similar tools).
3. Add a new model in the CADTree making reference to the copied model file in the destination robot folder.
4. Update the destination robot job with the "Update Job from Model" dialog.
HW0483092
8.6 Export CAD File from Job
8.6
Export CAD File from Job
NOTE When IGES or SAT data are exported (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-CadPack is
required. (The MotoSim EG-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EG.)
Exports, in IGES,SAT or HSF format, the selected models for each control points of a job.
The exported CAD data can be of two types:
CAD model data referring to imported CAD data in IGES or SAT format or to MotoSimEG models (.mdl) composed of BOX, BOX2, CYLINDER, CONE2, SPHERE,
PIPE2, AXIS6, LINE, LINE2
A specified model [FRAME]
FRAME
HW0483092
8.6 Export CAD File from Job
Job display area
Export CAD File from JOB
Job display area
Displays the content of the current job.
The highlighted lines are the selected lines to be exported. On initial display, all the lines are selected.
Multiple lines can be selected by holding the [Ctrl] or [Shift] key while left
clicking lines with the mouse
The [Ctrl] key, allows adding or removing the clicked line from the selection.
The [Shift] key, allows range selection of all the lines between the last
selected line and the clicked line.
HW0483092
8.6 Export CAD File from Job
Export CAD File from JOB
“Step Selection”
section
Selects the job steps for which the "Export Model" will be exported. For
each selected step, a copy of the "Export Model" is exported in the position
corresponding to that step.
[All steps] button
Selects all the lines in the Job display area.
[Instruction] button
Selects all the lines corresponding to the instruction specified in the
combobox list.
[Clear Selection] button
All the lines are unselected.
“Export Type”
section
Select the type of data that will be exported for every selected job step.
[CAD model]
The CAD model data of the Export Model will be exported.
Only model data referring to imported CAD data in
NOTE IGES,SAT or HSF format or to MotoSimEG models
(.mdl) composed of BOX, BOX2, CYLINDER, CONE2,
SPHERE, PIPE2, AXIS6, LINE, LINE2 is supported.
[Alternative model]
The alternative model "FRAME" will be exported at the location of the
"Export Model".
“Export Model
Root” section
Indicates the name of the root of the models to be exported at the control
point of each selected line. All child models under this root model will be
exported.The default setting depends on the "Export Type":
• When [CAD model] is selected, the default [Export Model Root]
will become the robot "flange" model.
• When [Alternative model] is selected, the default [Export Model
Root] will become the robot "tcp" model.
To change the root model, click the
button to display the "Select
Object" dialog and select the desired root model.
[Include root model] check box
When checked, the root model data will also be exported.
[Include station axis] check box
When checked, if the job contains station position information, this
station axis model and its child models are also exported to the CAD
file.
“Export Base
Point” section
Indicates the name of the model that will be used to set the origin of the
exported model data.
(The default base point is the origin of the "world" model.)
To change the root model, click the
button to display the "Select
Object" dialog and select the model to be used as base point and press
[OK].
HW0483092
8.6 Export CAD File from Job
Export CAD File from JOB
[Export CAD
file] button
Exports the CAD data (IGES,SAT or HSF data) at the control point of each
selected step of the job.
[Close] button
Closes the "Export CAD file from JOB” dialog (without exporting the CAD
file).
Procedure
1. On the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job] button to select the job
exported as the CAD data.
2. On the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group, click the [Export CAD File From
Job] button to display the [Export CAD File From Job] dialog box.
3. Select the steps of the job for which the "Export Model" is to be exported at the corresponding control point. Selection can be made with the "Step Selection" buttons or
directly in the job display area.
4. Select the type of CAD data to export in the [Export Type] section.
5. Select the models to export in the "Export Model Root" section.
Example 1: Multiple models are exported as one CAD data.
([Export Type]: CAD model)
Export Model Root : ES165NGUN3_flange
↓
"GUN2_MDT6_SAT" and "GUN_MTD6_SAT"
are exported as one CAD model.
HW0483092
8.6 Export CAD File from Job
Example 2: One gun model out of multiple models is exported.
([Export Type]: CAD model)
Export Model Root : [GUN_MTD6_SAT]
Include root model: checked
↓
Only [GUN_MTD6_SAT] is exported.
6. Select the model to use as the CAD file point of origin, in the [Export Base Point] section.
7. In the "Save As" dialog, select the file type (IGES,SAT or HSF). Enter a filename and
press the [Save] button.
HW0483092
8.6 Export CAD File from Job
8. If the "Export" dialog is set to display, the "Export" dialog will display to confirm the
IGES/SAT export settings. Change the settings as required, and then press [OK]. For
more details please refer to the " Export " section above.
9. When the export is completed the following message will display.
HW0483092
8.7 Collision Detection
8.7
Collision Detection
This function displays the collision between some models.
When the collision is detected, the model is displayed in red, and the robot pulse data and the
executing job name is displayed in the collision log.
To use the Collision detection, the following settings are needed.
1. The model (work, robot, etc.) group is registered as "Collision model group".
2. To detect collision, the model group pairing is registered as "Collision pair".
3. Select the Collision pair, and start the Collision Detection.
For details, please refer to section " 11.4 Collision Detection Setting ".
8.7.1
Collision Detection Dialog
In this dialog, set up to detect collision, and operate the start/end the collision detection.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Collisions] group, click the [Collision Detection] button, the
[Collision Detection] dialog appears.
3.Select the collision
pair to be used.
1.Register the collision
model group.
4.Start/End the collision
detection.
2.Register the collision
pair.
Reset the collision log, or
copy the collision log to
clipboard.
When the data need be
outputted in the form of
tab delimited, select the
[ExcelOption] on the
copy dialog.
Collision log list
When the collision log is
clicked, the robot moves
the interfering position.
HW0483092
8.7 Collision Detection
Collision Detection dialog option
Item
Description
Collision Color (RED)
The interfering model is displayed in red.
Playback without
Redraw
To reduce the time to check collision, Redraw is skipped on playback.
Move Collision Step
When the collision log is clicked, the robot moves the interfering position, and the cursor location in the virtual pendant moves to the step
number position recorded in that log.
When this operation is used, set the teach mode.
Near miss check
When the models approach with in the selected distance, the models
are considered interfering.
• The function is not available for hidden model.
NOTE • Near miss check option may need time to process.
8.7.2
Collision Model Group Setting
Collision Model Group Display

The model (work, robot, etc.) group is registered as "Collision model group".
To display the Collision Model Group dialog box, click the [ModelGroup] button on the Collision setting dialog box.
Collision Model Group
List
Collision Model Group
Item
Description
Collision Model Group
List
The registered collision model group is displayed.
When the collision model group is selected, the models of the collision
model group are highlighted.
Add
The new collision model group is created.
HW0483092
8.7 Collision Detection
Collision Model Group
Item

Description
Edit
The collision model group selected in the list is edited.
When the collision model group in the list is double-clicked, that can be
edited.
Copy
The new collision model group is created based on the collision model
group selected in the list.
Del
The collision model group selected in the list is deleted.
Del All
All collision model group selected in the list are deleted.
Collision Model Group Detail Display
The models (work, robot, etc.) are registered/deleted to the collision model group.
To display the Collision Model Group Detail dialog box, click the [Add] button, the [Edit] button,
or the [Copy] button on the Collision Model Group dialog box
.
Collision Model Group Detail
Item
Description
On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [Select Model] button. Select the model in the MotoSim EG-VRC, that model is added to
the [Model List].
Pick Enable
HW0483092
8.7 Collision Detection
Collision Model Group Detail
Item
Add from CadTree
Description
Select the model on the CadTree, and click the [Add from CadTree]
button, that model is added to the [Model List].
When the model is added, the child model of that is also registered
simultaneously.
For example, If the "SAKU" is selected in the CadTree and the [Add
from CadTree] button is clicked, the child models "SAKU1", "SAKU2",
"SAKU3", "SAKU4", "SAKU5", and "SAKU6" are also added.
("SAKU" is dummy model, so it is not added.)
A child model is also
registered simultaneously
Del
The selected model in the [Model List] is deleted.
Del All
All models in the [Model List] are deleted.
HW0483092
8.7 Collision Detection
8.7.3

Collision Definition Setting
Collision Definition Dialog
To detect collision, the model group pairing is registered as "Collision pair".
To display the Collision Definition dialog box, click the [Add] button, and the [Edit] button on
the Collision Detection dialog box.
Collision Detection function check if master interfere slaves. So, select one model group as
Master, and Select one or more model group(s) as Slave.
Collision model group
list
Select the model group to
check collision.
Master is only one model
groups.
Collision Definition
Item
Description
Collision model group
list
The registered collision model group is displayed in the list.
When the collision model group is selected, the models of the collision
model group are highlighted.
To check the collision model group, set the Attribute items "Master" or
"Slave".
Playback stop by collision detection
Set the robot action when collision occurs. If this is checked, playback
is stopped when collision is detected in playback. When the playback
is continued without interruption, do not check this, and register the
collision definition.
HW0483092
8.8 Running an External Software
8.8
Running an External Software
To run an external software with MotoSim EG, on the [Home] tab, in the [Tools] group, click the
[Execute Soft] button to display Launcher dialog box.
Launcher Dialog Box
Item
Description
Select [Add] to register the software to run; the Launcher Setting dialog box
appears.
Press the [Browse] button on the right of the Path edit box. Select the desired
program (executable file), and press [OK]. (The file name will be automatically
entered in the Name edit box.)
[Add] button
Path name of
the external
program to run.
Executable file name
of the path: ".EXE"
(directly editable.)
File name opened by the software specified
in the Path edit box. (Directly editable.)
[Edit] button
Edits the settings of the registered software.
[Delete] button
Deletes the registered software.
HW0483092
8.8 Running an External Software
Launcher Dialog Box
Item
Description
Double-click the desired software in the “Keyword” column to run the external
software.
“Keyword”
column
Double-click to run the software.
HW0483092
9.1 Cad Tree
9 Model Editings
This chapter explains the operations for creating and editing the workpiece and tool models
using the CAD functions.
A model is generally created by combining basic figures, such as cubes and cylinders; in addition to the general method, MotoSim EG supports the model creation by reading HSF and
HMF data.
9.1
Cad Tree
9.1.1
Outline of the Cad Tree
On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [Cad Tree] dialog
appears.
Press to create
a new model.
Button to
change position.
Button to set
model opacity.
Model selection display
Note: Right-click the mouse on
this display to open the
menu for operation and
edition of the model.
Model
(MDL) dummy
Robot
Model
(HMF,
HSF)
Display
Hide
Select display style of a model from the combo box.
SeeAll : Displays the model and its frame.
Model Only : Displays only the model.
Frame Only : Displays only the frame.
Hide All : Hides everything.
Show Name : Add the model name to the current display
setting.
Wireframe : Changes the model display mode to wireframe
*Note that in this dialog box, "frame" represents a coordinate
axis of a model.
Select display/nondisplay the child model in the Cad Tree.
:Displays the child model in the Cad Tree.
:Hides the child model in the Cad Tree.
*1) If a display style of a model (See, Hide, etc.) is selected in " " status,
the model and their child models in lower layers will be displayed in the
same style.
*2) If a model is deleted in " " status, the model and their child models in
lower layers will be deleted, except for "world", "Teacher", and the robot
models.
HW0483092
9.1 Cad Tree
9.1.2
Tree Structure
The Cad Tree displays a column of models in a tree structure.
As shown in the following diagram, a model in the level immediately above the subject model
is the parent model of the subject model.
Parent model of "dai", "FLOOR",
"worldframe", and "H6".
world
Parent model of "work".
dai
work
FLOOR
worldframe
H6
9.1.3
Opacity Settings
To set the model opacity, select the model in the Cad Tree and set the value using the spin
button indicated in the following figure.
The maximum value of opacity is “1.00”. Decreasing the value below the maximum value
reduces the opacity, the model becomes translucent enabling to see other models through it.
If the value is set to “0”, the model becomes completely transparent and can no longer be
seen.
Spin button to specify opacity.
HW0483092
9.1 Cad Tree
9.1.4
Teacher
"Teacher" is a tool to create a target point (coordinate) at an arbitrary position, and is displayed as an AXIS6 frame on the screen. It simplifies the use of OLP-related function and the
relocation of parts.
To enable the Teacher, point the cursor to "Teacher" in the Cad Tree, and click on [Pos] to display the “Position Teacher” dialog box. Specify the values in this dialog box. (For further detail
on the "Position" dialog box, please refer to " 9.5 Positioning a Model ").
(2) Select [Pos].
(1) Select "Teacher".
Set the incremental value
of the spin button
9.1.5

Mouse-Driven Model Editing
Right Mouse Button Operation
A pop-up menu for model editing operation appears by clicking the right mouse button at a
location where a model is displayed.
However, note that the viewpoint operation menu appears when clicking the right mouse button where there is no model displayed or when the Cad Tree is not on the screen.
Menu for model editing.
HW0483092
9.2 Creating a New Model
9.2
Creating a New Model
To start creating a new model, click on [Add] of the Cad Tree menu to display the Add Model
dialog box.
Procedure
1. Enter a name of the new model to be created in the Name edit box of the Add Model
dialog box.
(By default, the model name and the model file name are the same: the model file is
created with the model name.)
2. Click [OK] in the Add Model dialog box.
A newly created model is displayed in the Cad Tree. (Note that new model file does
not contain any data at this point.)
3. Double-click the new model name in the Cad Tree to edit the model.
The file data editing dialog box (as shown below) appears; refer to " 9.3 Editing a Part "
to edit the file data.
4. When the creation of the model is completed, click [Close] to complete the file data
editing.
HW0483092
9.2 Creating a New Model

Creating a Model from an Existing Model
A new model creation can be achieved not only by creating parts with the CAD function, but
also with an existing model file. In addition to those methods, a new model can also be added
with the method explained in " 9.11 Reading a Model ".
Procedure
1. Click [Add] of the Cad Tree, or select {File} - {New Model} from the right-click menu of
the Cad Tree.
2. The Add Model dialog box appears. Press the [...] button on the left of the File Name
edit box to select a file.
3. Enter a new model name in the Name edit box of the Add Model dialog box.
4. Click [OK].
5. If the model file path doesn't correspond to the "models" folder under the cell folder, the
following dialog box will display and offer to copied model file to the "models" folder of
the cell.
If the "Yes" button is clicked and a file with the same name already exists in the cell
"models" folder. The following dialog will display to ask for overwrite confirmation.
When adding LINE data (wire frame), it is recommended to use LINE data in the HMF for-
NOTE mat: adding LINE data in other format may take some time.
If the LINE data is in a format other than HMF, convert the LINE data with “MDL2HMF.EXE”
before adding the model. (The MDL2HMF.EXE is located in a folder where MotoSim EG-VRC
was installed).
HW0483092
9.2 Creating a New Model

Creating a Dummy Model
Dummy model is a model with only the position and direction data and no modeling data
(model file). Normally, external servo track or rotation axis have a reference position that is
fixed and unchangeable (even if it is changed, it returns to the original position when opening
the cell next time).
To avoid such problem, use a dummy model: create a dummy model, then register the external axis as a child model of the dummy model. This way, the reference position of the external
axis or rotating axis can be moved by changing the reference position of the dummy model.
Procedure
1. Click [Add] on the Cad Tree dialog box, or select {File} - {New Model} from the rightclick menu of the Cad Tree.
2. The Add Model dialog box appears; enter a new model name in the Name edit box.
3. Check the [Dummy Model] check box.
4. Click [OK].
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part
9.3
Editing a Part
MotoSim creates a model data file by combining basic figures such as cubes and cylinders:
such figures are called "parts" in this manual.
The following sections explain on how to edit the parts using the file data editing dialog box of
the Cad Tree.
9.3.1
Displaying the File Data Editing Dialog Box
In the Cad Tree, double-click the model to be edited, or select {Attribute} - {Edit File Data} to
display the file data editing dialog box as follows:
Select a part type.
Parts list.
File data editing dialog box
Item
Description
[Add] button
Displays a dialog box to edit the part selected in [Add Parts] combo
box. Also displays the added part on the cell window.
[Edit] button
Displays a dialog box to edit the part selected in the parts list.
(Multiple selection is not possible.)
[Delete] button
Deletes the part selected in the parts list.
(Multiple selection is not possible.)
[Move Org] button
Changes the parent of the part selected in the parts list.
Refer to " 9.9.1 Changing the Parent Model " for details.
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part
File data editing dialog box
Item
Description
Stores/Retrieves the data of the part selected in the parts list on the
clipboard.
[ClipBoard...] button
[Close] button
9.3.2
Closes the file data editing dialog box.
Registering a Part
Procedure
1. Select a type of parts to be added in [Add Parts] combo box in the file data editing dialog box.
2. Click [Add] to display the part on the cell window; the parts editing dialog box appears.
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part
3. See descriptions below to edit the part in the parts editing dialog box:
• Enter the values for model size, position, etc. with the spin buttons
or keystrokes. (The incremental value of the spin buttons is specified in the Step combo
box.)
• Click [Color...] to display the Color dialog box, and specify the color.
• To move the part to an arbitrary point with the Teacher, set the Teacher to the target
position; click [Goto] in the "Teacher" section to move the part to the teacher coordinate. To move the part including the posture to the teacher, check the [POSE]
check box and then click [Goto]. (For the details of the Teacher, refer to
" 9.1.4 Teacher ".)
4. When all the settings for the model are completed in the parts editing dialog box, click
[OK] to add the part to the model data file.
5. Create a model by repeating the steps 1 to 4 to register additional parts.
9.3.3
Part Types
This section explains on how to edit the parts according to the part type.

BOX
The BOX is a rectangular parallelepiped part, which can be edited in the BOX Edit dialog box.
• The origin of the part is the center of the BOX part model.
Origin of the part
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

BOX2
The BOX2 is a rectangular parallelepiped part, which can be edited in the BOX2 Edit dialog
box.
• The origin of the part is the vertex of the BOX2 part model.
Origin of the part

CYLINDER
The CYLINDER is a cylindrical part, which can be edited in the CYLINDER Edit dialog box.
• Selecting the [Straight] check box links the values of the upper and lower diameters
("U. Diameter" and "L. Diameter", respectively).
• The value in "Number" edit box represents the number of sides to form a cylinder: the
larger the number becomes, the more perfect the cylinder becomes. Therefore, when "3"
is input, the number of side faces becomes three, forming a triangular cylinder.
• The origin of the part is the center of the CYLINDER bottom.
Origin of the part
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

CONE2
The CONE2 is a conic part, which can be edited in the CONE2 Edit dialog box.
• The origin of the part is the center of the CONE2 bottom.
Origin of the part

SPHERE
The SPHERE is a spherical part, which can be edited with the "SPHERE Edit" dialog box.
• The origin of the part is the center of the sphere.
Origin of the part
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

PIPE2
The PIPE2 is a pipe part, which can be edited in the PIPE2 Edit dialog box.
• The values in "U. Thickness" and "L. Thickness" edit boxes respectively represent the
thickness of upper and bottom faces of the pipe.
• Selecting the [Straight Cylinder] check box links the upper and lower diameters ("U. Diameter" and "L. Diameter", respectively), and the upper and bottom face thickness.
• The origin of the part is the center of the PIPE2 bottom.
Origin of the part
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

AXIS6
The AXIS6 is a part that may contain multiple frames (position and orientation data). The
frames can be used as a target point or for external axis setting. It can be edited in the Frame
Edit dialog box.
• To add a frames, press [Insert]. The frames are added to the "Index" list box.
• To delete a frame, select the frame number in the "Index" list box, and press [Delete].
• To edit a frame, select the frame number in the "Index" list box and modify the values in
the "Position" section. The position can be displayed and modified relative to various
coordinated system depending on the "Operation" mode.
"Operation" combo box settings
"Absolute"
Displays the position with reference to the model frame.
"Relative"
Displays the position with reference to the frame original
position when initially selected in the "Index" list box.
"SelModel"
Displays the position with reference to a selected model.
When this mode is first selected the "Select Model" dialog
will display to allow selection of the reference model.
NOTE The frame corresponding to the selected "Index" of the list box is highlighted in red in the
main view.
Model name
Coordinate system (Changes
according to the operation mode)
AXIS6 model
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

LINE
The LINE is a part that contains multiple points. The points are links together by straight-line
segments to form a continuous line. It can be edited with the "LINE Edit" dialog box. A minimum of 2 points must be defined for the line to display. Points can be inserted, edited or
deleted in the same manner as the "FRAME Edit" dialog box. (Please refer to the " AXIS6 "
section for details).
Point 4
Point 2
Point 1
Point 3
Point 5
Origin of the part

LINE2
The LINE2 is a part that may contains multiple lines each made of 2 points. It can be edited
with the "LINE2 Edit" dialog box. The points with an odd index number are the starting points
and those with an even index number are the end points. The total number of defined points
must be even to display all the segments. Points can be inserted, edited or deleted in the
same manner as the "FRAME Edit" dialog box. (Please refer to the " AXIS6 " section for
details).
Start
Point 2
Point 3
End
Point 1
Start
Point 4
End
Origin of the part
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

CUBE
The CUBE is a polyhedron part, which can be edited in the CUBE Edit dialog box.
• When a CUBE model is added, a model with four points appears on the screen, with the
four points already registered in the CUBE Edit dialog box as shown below.
• The apex of the figure at the bottom is registered as a point from No. 1, the point in the
height direction is the last registered point in the model file form.
The points at the apex of the bottom figure are arranged as follows:
-When the height is set to Z-axis positive (+) direction: counterclockwise to Z-axis
positive (+) direction.
-When the height is set to Z-axis negavite (-) direction: clockwise to Z-axis positive
(+) direction.
Point 4
100
100
Point 2
Z-axis
Point 1
X-axis
Y-axis
100
Point 3

FLOOR
The FLOOR is a floor part, which can be edited in the FLOOR Edit dialog box.
• The values "X Num" and "Y Num" edit boxes respectively represent the numbers of dividing lines that divide the face in the X-direction and Y-direction.
• The origin of the part is the center of the FLOOR model.
Origin of the part
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

FACE
The FACE is a face part, which can be edited in the Face Edit dialog box.
• Register apexes to create faces.
Several faces can be created in one FACE part, however, there must be three or more
points to create each face. If the points are not in the same plane, the face will be divided
into some triangles. Therefore, unless these points are clearly on the same plane, create
the FACE with units of three points.
Point 1
Point 5
Point 7
FACE 1
Point 2
Point 6
Point 8
Point 3
FACE 2
FACE 3
Point 4
Point 9
Procedure
1. Select the [Pickup ON] check box.
(Clear the check box to change the viewpoint on the screen.)
2. Click the points 1, 2 and 3 as shown in the above figure.
The frame of the clicked point is displayed in "Vertex List" box. Click [Add Face>>] to
create the FACE 1 defined by three points.
3. Click the points 4 to 6, and click [Add FACE>>] to create FACE 2.
4. Click the points 7 to 9, and click [Add FACE>>] to create FACE 3.
HW0483092
9.3 Editing a Part

“Teacher” Section of the Parts Editing Dialog Box
The parts BOX, CYLINDER, CONE2, PIPE2, AXIS6, SPHERE, LINE, LINE2 can be relocated
by using the "Teacher" section of each editing dialog box.
When using the Teacher, it has to be previously set: refer to " 9.1.4 Teacher " for details.
“Teacher” section of the parts editing dialog box
Item
Description
[Goto] button
Moves the part to the Teacher position.
[POSE] check box
Moves the part including the posture to the Teacher position.
HW0483092
9.4 Editing a Model
9.4
Editing a Model
A model can be cut, copied, pasted, etc. with commands under {Edit} of the Cad Tree.
Select a model from the Cad Tree, and edit the model with the commands described below:

Cut
Cuts the selected model.

Copy
Copies the selected model.

Paste
Pastes the cut or copied model in an arbitrary place.
When selecting {Copy} - {Paste} within the same cell, enter the model name to be copied.

Delete
Deletes the selected model. However, the model file will not be deleted though the model is
deleted from the Cad Tree and the cell window.
When deleting the currently selected model including its child models are to be deleted, set
the display/nondisplay status ( + or ) on the left of the model name to + in the Cad Tree,
then select [Delete]. Note, however, that the "world", "Teacher", and robot model will not be
deleted even if they are in the + status.

Add
Creates a new model.
Refer to " 9.2 Creating a New Model " for details.

Rename
Changes the model name.
Note, however, that the names of "world", "Teacher", and the robot model names cannot be
changed.
HW0483092
9.4 Editing a Model

Property
Specifies opacity, scale, and model type. (The command {Property} is located under {Attribute}.)
Property dialog box
Item
Description
[Opacity] edit box
Specifies the opacity of the model.
[Scale] edit box
Specifies the scale of the model.
[Model Type] edit box
Specifies a character string in the model.
Set up whether the back plane of CAD data is shown or hidden.
When the back plane is shown, the CAD data is displayed according to
that data.
When the back plane is hidden, display speed is faster.
[Back Plane Culling]
check box
When the back plane is hidden, some parts of the CAD
NOTE data may be lost.
When the CAD data need be displayed collect, check off
the Back Plane Culling.
[OK] button
Applies the modifications, and closes the Property dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the Property dialog box without applying the modifications.
HW0483092
9.5 Positioning a Model
9.5
Positioning a Model
Position a model by specifying the values in the Position dialog box.
To display the Position dialog box, click on [Pos] button or select {Attribute} - {Set Position}
menu item of the Cad Tree.
Set the incremental value of
The spin button
Position dialog box
Item
Description
"Operation" combo box
“Absolute”
Displays the position with reference to the parent model, and
moves the model.
“Relative”
Displays the position with reference to the selected model, and
moves the model.
“SelModel”
Displays the Select Object dialog box; displays the position with reference to the model specified in the Select Object dialog box, and
moves the model.
HW0483092
9.5 Positioning a Model
Position dialog box
Item
Description
Allows to store or retrieve the data of the Position dialog box in the clipboard.
[matrix] button
“Teacher” section
Move the model to the Teacher current position.
[Goto] button
Moves the model to the Teacher position.
[POSE] check box
When checked and the [Goto] button is used, the model also
moves to match the Teacher orientation.
When using the Teacher, it has to be previously set: refer to " 9.1.4
Teacher " for details.
“Pick” section
[Enable] check box
Enables the mouse picking operation.
Pressing the [Shift] key enables or disables the "Pick Enable"
mode.
[Pick two points] check box
The chosen model is parallel-shifted so that the specified point of
the model may unite with the pick position of the 2nd point.
[Settings >>] or [<< Settings] buttons
Displays or hides the pick setting section.
“Move Mode” section
Determines the method to move to the picked point.
[Position] check box
The model is moved to the position (XYZ) of the picked point.
[Orientation] check box
The model is turned to match the orientation (Rx, Ry, Rz) of the
picked point frame.
[Axis] check box
The model axis specified in the combobox is turned so that it
matches the picked face normal.
[Reverse] check box
This setting is enable with [Orientation] or [Axis] mode. It can be
use to change the direction of the picked face normal.
“Pick Mode” section
Sets conditions determining the selected point in the clicked area.
Please refer to " Pick Mode Setting " for details.
“Pick Object” section
Sets the type of the object to be selected when clicking on the cell
view. (Multiple items can be selected)
Please refer to " Pick Object Setting " for details.
[OK] button
Applies the modifications, and closes the Position dialog box.
HW0483092
9.5 Positioning a Model
Position dialog box
Item
[Cancel] button
Description
Closes the Position dialog box without applying the modifications.
The operating procedure of a two-point pick is explained concretely below.
1. With the first pick, the point to align is specified.
First pick
2. With the second pick, the movement place is specified.
Second pick
3. The point specified as the first point moves to the position of the second point.
HW0483092
9.6 Editing Multiple Models (Model List)
9.6
Editing Multiple Models (Model List)
Multiple models can be edited in the Model List dialog box. To open the dialog box, select
{Edit} - {Models List} of the Cad Tree right-click menu.
Model selection list box
Model List dialog box
Item
Description
Model selection list box
Displays the models registered in the cell.
The selected models are highlighted. (Multiple selection is possible.)
[Delete] button
Deletes the models selected in the model selection list box. The models on the cell window are also deleted, however, their model files still
exist.
[Change Parent] button
Changes the parents of the models selected in the model selection list
box.
Refer to " 9.9.1 Changing the Parent Model " for details.
[Move Parent] button
Moves the parents of the models selected in the model selection list
box.
Refer to " 9.9.2 Moving the Parent Model " for details.
[Close] button
Closes the Model List dialog box.
HW0483092
9.7 Searching a Model
9.7
Searching a Model
Search for a desired model with the Find dialog box. To open the dialog box, select {Edit} {Find} from the Cad Tree right-click menu.
If the entered name exists, the model is selected in the Cad Tree.
Enter the model name.
HW0483092
9.8 Saving and Reading a Model Group
9.8
Saving and Reading a Model Group
A model and its parent-child relevant information can be saved as a set.
This can be done by creating a folder under [cell folder name\models] and naming it with the
same name as the subject model, then by saving the following files in the new folder:
• The parent-child relevant information of the model (ModelInfo.dat).
• Subject model and its all the child models (*.mdl, *.hsf).

Saving a Model Group
Procedure
1. Select a model with the status symbol (on the left of the selected model name) in the
Cad Tree set to + .
2. Select {Edit} - {Save Model Group] from the Cad Tree right-click menu.
Select [Yes] to create a folder with the same name as the model selected in the step 1.
The files of the model (selected in the step 1) and its child models are copied to the
folder, and a parent-child relevant information file "ModelInfo.dat" is generated.
HW0483092
9.8 Saving and Reading a Model Group

Reading a Model Group
Select {Edit} - {Load Model Group] from the Cad Tree right-click menu. Select a “ModelInfo.dat” file to read the saved model including its child models.
NOTE If there is a model with the same name in the current cell, the second one will automatically be
numbered. (The number will be added after the name.)

Syntax of the ModelInfo.dat
MODEL
{
NAME=Camera_Dummy //Logical name of the model
PARENT=world
//Parent model name
FILENAME=dummy
//File name
COLOR=RGB (0,0,255)
//Color of the model
HIDESEE=1
//Display/nondisplay information
OPACITY=0.25
//Opacity
AXIS6=4000.000,5500.000,2000.000,-1.57,0.00,-0.35 // Position of the model
}
HW0483092
9.9 Changing and Moving the Parent Model
9.9
9.9.1
Changing and Moving the Parent Model
Changing the Parent Model
The parent model of an arbitrary model can be changed with {Parent Change} under {Attribute} of the Cad Tree menu.
With this function, the relation (coordinate) between the selected model and its parent model
is automatically changed, and the model position does not change. Use this function in case
of changing the parent model while keeping the model in the same position.
To use this function, select the desired model in the Cad Tree, then select {Attribute} - {Parent
Change} from the Cad Tree right-click menu.
9.9.2
Moving the Parent Model
The parent model of an arbitrary model can be moved with {Parent Move} under {Attribute} of
the Cad Tree menu.
Since the relation (coordinate) between the selected model and its parent model does not
change with this function, the selected model position changes when it is moved to its new
parent model with {Parent Move}.
To use this function, select the desired model in the Cad Tree, then select {Attribute} - {Parent
Move} from the Cad Tree right-click menu.
HW0483092
9.10 Changing a Model File
9.10 Changing a Model File
The model file of an existing model can be changed with {ChangeFilePath} under {Attribute} of
the Cad Tree menu.
To use this function, select a model to be changed in the Cad Tree, then select {Attribute} {ChangeFilePath} from the Cad Tree menu. Select the desired model file in a file selection
dialog box to change the model file.
Note that the change will only take effect the next time the cell is open.
NOTE The model files for "world", "Teacher", and robot models cannot be changed.
HW0483092
9.11 Reading a Model
9.11 Reading a Model
A model appears on the cell by dragging and dropping its model file (in the HSF, HMF, MDL,
3DS, or RWX format) to the cell window, and the model file is copied to the "models" folder.
In this operation, a parent model can also be selected.
Drag and drop.
Model displayed on the cell.
Procedure
1. Drag and drop an arbitrary model to the cell window; If the model file path doesn't correspond to the "models" folder under the cell folder, the following dialog box will display
and offer to copied model file to the "models" folder of the cell.
If the "Yes" button is clicked and a file with the same name already exists in the cell
"models" folder. The following dialog will display to ask for overwrite confirmation.
HW0483092
9.11 Reading a Model
2. The Select Model Parent dialog will display. Select the model that will become the parent of the new model and press the [OK] button. (By default the "world" model is
selected.)
When adding LINE data (wire frame), it is recommended to use LINE data in the HMF for-
NOTE mat: adding LINE data in other format may take some time.
If the LINE data is in a format other than HMF, convert the LINE data with “MDL2HMF.EXE”
before adding the model. (The MDL2HMF.EXE is located in a folder where MotoSim EG-VRC
was installed).
HW0483092
9.12 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option>
9.12 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option>
NOTE To use this function (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is required. (The
MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EG-VRC.)
Loads the following CAD data format to the cell directly.
Format
Extension
Version
IGES
igs,iges
-5.3
STEP
stp,step
203,214
Inventor
ipt
V11-2015
ProE / Creo
prt,asm
16-Creo 3.0
Solidworks
sldprt,sldasm
2003-2014
CATIA V5
CATPart,CATProduct
R8-R24(V5-6R2014)
SAT
sat
R1-R25
Parasolid
x_t,x_b
9.0.* -27.0.*
DXF
dxf
2.5 -2014
HSF
hsf
-20.20
HMF
hmf
-20.20
VRML
wrl
2.0
STL
stl
―
3DS
3ds
―
RWX
rwx
―
PLY
ply
―
This function is accessible by:
a)The Add Model dialog of the [Cad Tree]
(For details, please refer to section " Creating a Model from an Existing Model ".)
b)Dragging and dropping the file over the cell display area.
(For details, please refer to section " 9.11 Reading a Model ".)
When adding a model with method a) Add Model dialog, it is necessary to select "All (*.*)"
NOTE in the "File Type" section, in order to display all the file types and be able to select the
IGES or SAT files.

CAD Data Import
Before importing CAD data, the "CAD Import" dialog will display. The healing settings in the
dialog can be changed if required. (This dialog doesn't display when importing SAT file.)
To change the default settings related to the CAD Import, please refer to section " 10.6 Mouse
Customization ".
HW0483092
9.12 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option>
The figure below shows, the "CAD
Import" dialog when the IGES data
healing is disabled.
This is the default setting.
The "CAD Import" dialog with the IGES
data healing enabled.
CAD Import
“Enable Healing” section
When enabled, a healing algorithm is applied to the imported CAD data.
[Recreate surface] check box
The [Recreate surface] option is normally selected.
The [Recreate surface] is part of the normal healing process. If it is
unselected, this step will be skipped in the healing process.
If the surface regeneration doesn't give the intended results, unselect
the "Recreate Surface" may improve the healing results.
[Disable on error] check box
The [Disable on error] option is normally selected.
When the [Disable on error] is selected, the healing will be disabled if
an error occurs during the healing process.
Imports the
work file for
CAM teaching
Select this type when the model applies a CAM function. Do not select this
type when the model is tool or peripheral equipment.
General CAD data are displayed
in the CadTree dialog, and the model
for CAM teaching are displayed
.
HW0483092
9.12 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option>
CAD Import
[High-Speed
Mode] check
box
When enabled, MotoSim EG-VRC reads only data necessary to drawing
from CAD data, so it may takes higher. But, When "Imports the work file for
CAM teaching" is enabled, this is disabled.
[Don't show this
dialog next time]
check box
If checked, the "IGES Import" dialog will no longer be displayed when an
IGES file is imported. The "IGES Import" dialog display can be re-enable in
the "Option Setting" dialog under the "CAD Import/Export" tab. Please
refer to section " 10.7 CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option> ".
[OK]button
The IGES file import will proceed with the options set in the dialog.
[Cancel]button
Cancel the IGES file import
The healing process attempts to repair any corrupted data of the imported CAD files.
NOTE However, the processing time to import a file may increase significantly when healing is used.
The performance may also vary depending on the extent and nature of the errors in the original CAD file. In some cases, result with healing may be worst than reading the file without
healing.
HW0483092
9.13 Changing the Coordinate Origin of CAD Data <CADPack Option>
9.13 Changing the Coordinate Origin of CAD Data
<CADPack Option>
Change the coordinate origin of external CAD data.
After [Cad Tree] is displayed, right-click on the work to change the coordinate origin and select
the [set Originpos] menu. Then the [Origin Point] dialog is displayed, change the value of position.
NOTE
This function is available only with the data which enabled [Imports the work file for CAM
teaching] at the time of reading of the following external CAD data.
CATIA, SOLIDWORKS, Pro/E, INVENTOR, IGES, STEP, SAT
It is possible to change the coordinate origin of external CAD data as follows.
HW0483092
9.14 CAD Data Export
9.14 CAD Data Export
When IGES or SAT data are exported (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack
NOTE is required. (The MotoSim EG-VRC-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EGVRC.)
Exports in IGES,SAT or HSF format the data of multiple models with their relative position
from a selected base point.

Export
Before the CAD data of IGES or SAT format is exported, the "Export" dialog is displayed. The
export settings in the dialog can be changed if required.
To change the default settings related to the export, please refer to section " 10.7 CAD
Import/Export <CadPack Option> ".
NOTE The settings selected in the "Export" dialog will not change the settings in the "Option
Setting" dialog under the "CAD Import/Export" tab.
Export
[Units] radio button
Sets the measuring units of the exported SAT or IGES files.
“Version (SAT Only)”
section
Sets the SAT file version used in the exported file.Recommended
value: 6 (Setting range: 4 to 16)
HW0483092
9.14 CAD Data Export
Export
[Don't show this dialog next time] check
box
If checked, the "IGES Import" dialog will no longer be displayed
when an IGES file is imported. The "IGES Import" dialog display can
be re-enable in the "Option Setting" dialog under the "CAD Import/
Export" tab. Please refer to section " 10.7 CAD Import/Export
<CadPack Option> ".
[OK]button
The CAD export will proceed with the options set in the dialog.
[Cancel]button
Cancel the CAD export.
Procedure
1. Select in the Cad Tree the models to export.
• To select a single model:
Expand the model node so that there is no "+" icon on the left of the model name
and select the model.
The “SAT1” model will be
exported.
• To select multiple models
Collapse the node containing the desired models so that there is a "+" icon on the
left of the model name. All the child models in the collapsed branch will also be
exported.
The child “SAT1” and “SAT2” model of
the “POS” model will be exported.
HW0483092
9.14 CAD Data Export
NOTE
Only the model referring to
• IGES,SAT or HSF format files;
• .mdl files composed of BOX, BOX2, CYLINDER, CONE2, SPHERE, PIPE2, AXIS6,
LINE, LINE2 parts;
can be exported. When selecting multiple models, at least one of the selected models
must make reference to such CAD file.
2. Right click on the CadTree to display the popup menu. Then select "Export CAD
File..."
3. In "Select Base Model" dialog, select the model to be used as the base point (origin) of
the exported model and press the [OK] button.
4. In the "Save As" dialog, select the file type (IGES,SAT or HSF). Enter a filename and
press the [Save] button.
HW0483092
9.14 CAD Data Export
5. If the "Export" dialog is set to display, the "Export" dialog will display to confirm the
IGES/SAT export settings. Change the settings as required, and then press [OK]. For
more details please refer to the " Export " section above.
6. When the export is completed the following message will display.
HW0483092
10.1 Graphical Settings
10 Configuration Settings
Various configuration settings can be made in the Option Setting dialog box.
Click the MotoSim EG-VRC button (
), and select the [Options] menu.
10.1 Graphical Settings
For the graphical settings, select the “Graphic” tab of the Option Setting dialog box.
Graphic tab
Item
Description
[Reset] button
Restores all the values to the default setting.
[OK] button
Applies the modifications, and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without applying the modifications.
HW0483092
10.1 Graphical Settings
10.1.1
Background Color
Specify the background color of the cell window in the “Background Color” section.
Item
Description
"Top" color
indication box
Displays the current color of the upper part of the background.
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select the desired color.
"Bottom" color
indication box
Displays the current color of the bottom part of the background.
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select the desired color.
[Same Color]
check box
Check this check box to set the “Bottom” background color to the same
color as the “Top” background.
10.1.2
Smooth Transition
Specify if a smooth transition is executed when changing viewpoint in the “Smooth Transition”
section.
Item
Description
[Execute] check box
Select to execute the smooth transition function when changing the
viewpoint.
"Duration" edit box
Specify the duration of the smooth transition. (Editable when the [Execute] check box is selected.)
10.1.3
Display
Configure the graphic driver in the "Display" section.
Item
Description
Select a graphic driver from the list: "OpenGL" is selected by default.
The graphic drivers currently available are "OpenGL" and "WinGDI".
"Driver" combo box
NOTE To apply the change of graphic driver, reload the cell.
Displays the coordinate axis below on the lower left of the cell window.
[Axis Triad On]
check box
HW0483092
10.1 Graphical Settings
Item
Description
[Perspective]
check box
10.1.4
Check this check box to display the cell in perspective.
Shadow
Set the following items for shadow display in the “Shadow” section.
Item
Description
[Show] check box
Select to display shadows on the cell window.
"Color" indication box
Displays the current color of the shadows.
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select a desired color.
(The [color] button is enabled when the [Show] check box is selected.)
"Resolution" edit box
Enter the resolution value.
(Editable when the [Show] check box is selected.)
"Blurring" edit box
Enter the value for the gradation effect.
(Editable when the [Show] check box is selected.)
10.1.5
Frame & AXIS6
Specify the Frame and Axis6 display property.
Item
Description
“Frame Length” spin
box
Enter the value of the frame and Axis6 length with the spin button.
"Always Display Axis6
in Front" checkbox
When checked, the Axis6 are displayed in front of all the other parts.
Regular Display
Axis6 Displayed in Front
HW0483092
10.1 Graphical Settings
10.1.6
Level of Detail
When changing the scene viewpoint or during playback the level of detail can be decrease in
order to obtain a smoother animation. This function is useful to improve display performance
of cell containing a large amount of data such as very detailed HSF model.
Item
Description
When this item is checked, the level of detail will be reduced during viewpoint change and playback. The level of detail data will also be generated for the HSF models when required.
NOTE
Enable
• When the function is enabled, a message offers to generate the level of detail data for the currently opened
cell. If the data was previously generated for this cell, it
is not necessary to regenerate the data and you may
press "Cancel".
• The generation of the level of detail data may take
some time depending on the size of the model file.
NOTE
• When the displayed surface becomes rougher during viewpoint change or playback,
depending on the data some model elements may not display.
• It is easier to distinguish the discrepancies between levels of detail when displaying the
cell in "Flat Shading" (refer to section " 6.11 Changing the Rendering Mode ").
Displayed surface
become rough
HW0483092
10.1 Graphical Settings

Generating the Level of Detail Data
When the Level of Detail function is enabled, the level of detail data need to be generate for
the function to work properly. If an opened cell doesn't contain the level of detail data, a message will prompt the user to confirm that the data should be generated at this time.
While generating the level of detail data, the "Generating Level of Detail" dialog will display the
generation progress. To stop the data generation, click on the "Abort" button. Note that when
aborting the generation, the current file processing will continue until completed, and then the
gen-eration will stop and data for the remaining file will not be created
.
When adding HSF model and the Level of Detail is enable, the level of detail data will automatically be generated for the new model. The "Generating Level of Detail" progress dialog
will display but the process cannot be aborted.
HW0483092
10.2 Markup Settings
10.2 Markup Settings
To configure the lines and texts on the cell window, select the "Mark Up" tab of the Option Setting dialog box.
Mark Up tab
Item
"Mark up" section
Description
"Color" indication box
Displays the current color of the markup object (line and text).
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select the desired
color.
"Thickness" spin box
Directly enter the value or specify the value with the spin button
specify the thickness of the markup line.
HW0483092
to
10.2 Markup Settings
Mark Up tab
Item
Description
"Font Name" combo box
Select a desired font for the text.
NOTE When using two-byte characters for the text, make sure
to select a font which can be displayed properly.
"Text" section
"Size (pts.)" edit box
Specify the size of the font.
"Back Color" indication box
The color indication box displays the current markup text background
color.
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box. And select the desired
background color.
[Reset] button
Restores all the values to the default setting.
[OK] button
Applies the modifications, and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without applying the modifications.
HW0483092
10.3 Robot Option Settings
10.3 Robot Option Settings
When a robot axis reaches its limit position, the color of the axis changes.
Robot Option tab
Item
Description
[Execute in Teach] check box
Select to display the axis reaching its limit in a reverse color or a limit
color in a teaching operation.
[Execute in Play] check box
Select to display the axis reaching its limit in a reverse color or a limit
color in a playback operation.
"Limit Value (%)" edit box
Directly enter the value to specify the limit value for the limit axis check.
"Pulse limit warning"
section
For example, the limit range is plus or minus 5% if the
NOTE limit value is set at "90". (If the limit value is set at “80”,
the limit range is plus or minus 10%.)
[Reverse Color] check box
Select to reverse the color of the axis reaching its limit in its opposing
color.
"Color at Limit" indication box
Displays the current limit color.
Press [color] to display the Color dialog box, and select the desired
color.
HW0483092
10.3 Robot Option Settings
Robot Option tab
Item
Description
When this item is checked, the job playback animation is stored in memory. After the playback, the animation can then be exported in HSF file format.
"Playback Animation" section
NOTE
• The playback animation file does not support any
model color change the may occur during playback
(such as collision detection, limit warning... ).
• For the file export operation, please refer to the " 4.6.1
Playback animation file export "section.
"Multiple Robot Dialog" section
When enabled MotoSimEG will display a separate copy of robot related
dialog or panel for each robot in the cell. When a dialog is initially displayed, it is set to the currently selected robot. Once displayed the dialog
will always display the information for the same robot, even if the current
robot is changed. To display multiple copy of a same dialog, display a first
copy of the dialog, then change the current robot and display the dialog
again.
[Reset] button
Restores all the values to the default setting.
[OK] button
Applies the modifications, and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without applying the modifications.
HW0483092
10.4 Language and Unit Settings
10.4 Language and Unit Settings
To configure the language and unit, select the "Lang / Unit" tab of the Option Setting dialog
box.
Lang / Unit tab
Item
"Language" section
Description
Select the [Japanese] or [English] radio button to configure the language.
To set from the main menu, select {View} - {English} or {Japanese}.
Select the units for each type of values.
"Unit Settings"
section
"Length/Position" edit box
Indicates the unit of the length.
"Angle" edit box
Indicates the unit of the angle.
"Weight" edit box
Indicates the unit of the weight.
[Reset] button
Restores all the values to the default setting.
[OK] button
Applies the modifications, and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without applying the modifications.
HW0483092
10.5 Performance Settings
10.5 Performance Settings
To configure the performance, the "Performance" tab of the Option Setting dialog box.
Performance tab
Item
"Framerate Optimization"
section
Description
"None" radio button
All model data are displayed.
"Culling Threshold" radio button
Model data which displayed size is smaller than the
selected pixel on the display are not displayed.
If the threshold is large, performance is
NOTE improved. But, if the threshold is overlarge, the
necessary model data are not displayed. Set up
the threshold in accordance with the model data.
[Reset] button
Restores all the values to the default setting.
[OK] button
Applies the modifications, and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] button
Closes the dialog box without applying the modifications.
HW0483092
10.6 Mouse Customization
10.6 Mouse Customization
The mouse button allocation of viewpoint operation can be changed.
Presses the allocable mouse button and key in the edit box, the mouse button allocation of
viewpoint operation is changed.
The allocable mouse button and key are as follows.
• Middle button(mouse)
• Right button(mouse)
• [CTRL] key
• [SHIFT] key
Mouse Customization
Scroll ・ Zoom
Presses the allocable mouse button and key in the edit box, the
allocated key to Scroll?Zoom is displayed.
Rotate
Presses the allocable mouse button and key in the edit box, the
allocated key to Rotate is displayed.
Pan
Presses the allocable mouse button and key in the edit box, the
allocated key to Pan is displayed.
Free Zoom
Presses the allocable mouse button and key in the edit box, the
allocated key to Free Zoom is displayed.
HW0483092
10.6 Mouse Customization
Mouse Customization
Show Viewpoint Operation Bar
When enabled, viewpoint operation bar is displayed.
Click the above button, viewpoint operation by right button is
changed.
If unchecked, viewpoint operation bar is hidden.
[Reset] button
Setting is changed into default.
[OK] button
Setting is saved and this dialog is closed.
[Cancel] button
Setting is canceled and this dialog is closed.
HW0483092
10.7 CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option>
10.7 CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option>
NOTE To use this function (CadPack option), the MotoSim EG-CadPack is required. (The MotoSim EG-CadPack is separate product from MotoSim EG.)
10.7.1
CAD Import
Option settings related to reading CAD format files.
“Enable Healing”
section
When enabled, a healing algorithm is applied to the importedCAD data.
[Recreate surface] check box
The [Recreate surface] option is normally selected.
The [Recreate surface] is part of the normal healing process. If it is
unselected, this step will be skipped in the healing process.
If the surface regeneration doesn't give the intended results, unselect the
"Recreate Surface" may improve the healing results.
[Disable on
error] check box
The [Disable on error] option is normally selected.
When the [Disable on error] is selected, the healing will be disabled if an
error occurs during the healing process.
HW0483092
10.7 CAD Import/Export <CadPack Option>
Imports the work
file for CAM teaching
Select this type when the model applies a CAM function. Do not select this
type when the model is tool or peripheral equipment.
General CAD data are displayed
in the CadTree dialog, and the model
for CAM teaching are displayed
.
[High-Speed Mode]
check box
When enabled, MotoSim EG-VRC reads only data necessary to drawing
from CAD data, so it may takes higher. But, When "Imports the work file for
CAM teaching" is enabled, this is disabled.
[Uses External
Converter] check
box
When enabled, CAD data is converted by outside CAD converter software
and MotoSim EG-VRC imports the converted CAD data. When not
enabled, MotoSim EG-VRC converts the CAD data.
[Don't show the
[CAD Import] dialog] check box
When this option is selected, the "CAD Import" dialog will not display when
an IGES file is read.
NOTE For details on the CAD data import, please refer to section "
9.12 CAD Data Import <CadPack Option> ".
The healing process attempts to repair any corrupted data of the imported CAD files. However,
NOTE the processing time to import a file may increase significantly when healing is used. The per-
formance may also vary depending on the extent and nature of the errors in the original CAD
file. In some cases, result with healing may be worst than reading the file without healing.
10.7.2
IGES/SAT Export
Units
Sets the measuring units of the exported SAT or IGES files.
Version (SAT
Only)
Sets the SAT file version used in the exported file.
Recommended value: 6 (Setting range: 4 to 16)
[Don't show the
[Export] dialog]
check box
When this option is selected, the "Export" dialog will not display when the
"Export CAD file" function is used.
NOTE For details on the IGES, SAT data export, please refer to
section " 9.14 CAD Data Export ".
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
11 Applied Operation
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
11.1.1
What is OLP Function?
Normally, teaching operation uses the programming pendant to move the robot model to the
target position. The OLP function is a quick and efficient way to move the robot to a target
position. When the desired destination is located on a model, by using the OLP panel, the
end of the tool (TCP) can conveniently be moved to the target position by simply clicking on
the screen (for example, any point of a workpiece, etc.).
SUPPLEMENT
• When moving the robot tool end with the OLP function, the message "Cannot reach this
point" may appear even if the robot is not too far from the target point. This may happen
when the tool end cannot be moved to the target point due to the shape or current posture of the robot.
• A point other than the target point may be selected depending on the point clicked and
the view position. When this occurs, use the programming pendant to move the robot or
change the camera scope of the screen to click on the proper model.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
11.1.2
Teaching Operation
The teaching operation is explained by using “Arc_Samp_Nx.cel” as an example.
Procedure
1. Open “Arc_Samp_Nx.cel”.
(If it is difficult to perform the teaching operation, hide the displayed models such as
fence, controller, etc. by selecting “Hide” from the combo box on the Cad Tree dialog
box.)
2. On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button to display OLP dialog as shown below.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
3. Display the cell window so that the workpiece is visible as shown in the figure below.

Position Designation in Free Mode
In "Free" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the point of the model corresponding to the
clicked position.
1. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
2. Click on the following position of the workpiece model displayed in the cell window.
Click here.
3. The tool end moves to the clicked position.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
Click on another point, and the tool end moves to the clicked position.

Position Designation in Vertex Mode
In "Vertex" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the model vertex nearest to the clicked position.
1. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
2. Click on the following position of the workpiece model displayed in the cell window.
Click a side near
the corner.
3. The tool end moves to the nearest vertex.
Click on a point near another vertex to check if the tool end moves to the nearest ver-
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
tex.

Position Designation in Center Mode
In "Center" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the face or edge center nearest to the clicked
position.
.
1. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
2. Click on the following position of the workpiece model displayed in the cell window.
Click the side face.
3. The tool end moves to the center point of the designated model face or edge.
If the tool overlaps on the model, the tool direction is improper. Use the programming
pendant to correct the position afterward.
Click on another face to check if the tool end moves to the center of the designated
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
model face.

Position Designation in Edge Mode
IIn "Edge" mode, the tool end (TCP) moves to the edge point nearest to the clicked position.
.
1. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
2. Cick on the following position of the workpiece model displayed in the cell window.
Click here.
3. The tool end moves to the edge point nearest to the clicked position. Click on another
face point to check if the tool end moves to the closest edge.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function

Designation with Orientation Mode
Orientation Move Mode can be used by itself or in combination with the Position Mode.
Checking the [Orientation] checkbox rotates the tool end frame to align it with the target point
frame. If the [Position] mode is also check, the tool end will also move overlap the target
frame. Therefore, if you only want to change the orientation of the tool without moving it,
make sure to uncheck the [Position] checkbox.
The target point frame appears when the left mouse button is pressed down on a model and is
represented by 3 colored arrows. The red arrow is the Z-axis and corresponds to the normal
(or reversed normal) of the face where lies target point; the blue arrow is the X-axis and is
defined by the face edge closest to the point; and the green arrow is the Y-axis and is orthogonal to the two other axis.
NOTE
• That some geometries, such as lines or points, do not have sufficient information to generate a frame information. In such cases, the tool end will maintain its original orientation.
• The direction of the Z-axis can be changed by selecting [Normal] or [Reverse] mode in
the "Use Face:" section.
Procedure
1. Hide the T-shape workpiece and the stand to make it easier to create a new workpiece.
To hide the lower hierarchy of the "DAI" tree, on the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group,
click the [CadTree] button. Confirm that the cursor points to “DAI”, then select “Hide” to
hide the model.
2. Select “World” in the Cad Tree and click on the [Add] button to add the BOX of the following specifications.
Model: WORK2
Width (W)
500
Depth (D)
500
Height (H)
50
X (mm)
0
Y (mm)
0
Z (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Rz (degree)
0
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
3. Click on the [Pos] button in the Cad Tree to set the position as shown in the table
below.
X (mm)
800
Y (mm)
Rx (degree)
150
Ry (degree)
0
-20
Z (mm)
Rz (degree)
560
0
4. To see and understand the coordinate axis of “WORK2”, select “WORK2” in the Cad
Tree, then select “SeeAll” to display the Frame of the coordinate axis on the “WORK2”.
5. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
6. Click on the position of the “WORK2” as shown below.
Click.
7. The tool end moves to the model vertex and the tool coordinate axis is aligned in the
same direction as the target point frame that was displayed when the point was clicked.
If the [Orientation] checkbox is not checked, the direction of the tool coordinate axis will
not be changed as shown below.

Designation with Z-Axis Mode
Z-Axis Move Mode can be used by itself or in combination with the Position Mode. Checking
the [Z-Axis] checkbox rotates the tool end frame to align its Z-axis with the target point Z-axis.
If the [Position] mode is also check, the tool end will also move overlap the target frame.
Therefore, if you only want to change the orientation of the tool without moving it, make sure
to uncheck the [Position] checkbox.
The target point Z-Axis appears when the left mouse button is pressed down on a model and
is represented by a red arrows. For a solid, the Z-axis corresponds to the normal (or reversed
normal) of the face where lies target point. For a line, it corresponds to the line direction to the
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
next closest point.
NOTE
• Tat points do not have sufficient information to generate Z-axis information. In such
cases, the tool end will maintain its original orientation. .
• The direction of the Z-axis can be changed by selecting [Normal] or [Reverse] mode in
the "Use Face:" section.
Procedure
The procedure is explained by using "WORK2", which has been used in "Designation with Orientation Mode", as an example.
1. Move the robot to its home position.
2. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
3. 3.Click on the face of the "Work2", and the tool Z-axis will turn so that the tool end is
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
perpendicular to the clicked face of the model.

Pick Object Filter
The "Pick Object" section allows setting the type of model that can be selected with mouse.
Use this section when pick operation cannot be executed properly because the objects overlap each other. This setting filters which object types can be selected and enables proper pick
operation.
Procedure
The procedure is explained by using “WORK2”, which has been used in " Designation with
Orientation Mode ", as an example.
1. Display the Cad Tree; hide the “WORK2” and display the “DAI”.
2. Select “DAI” in the Cad Tree to add the AXIS6 of the following specifications.
Model: DAI (AXIS6) Frame No.: 0
X (mm)
0
Y (mm)
0
Z (mm)
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Rz (degree)
-100
0
Newly added
AXIS6
The AXIS6 is inside the BOX. (To see AXIS6 make sure that the Axis6 are always displayed in front in the "Options" dialog. Please refer to section " 10.1.5 Frame & AXIS6
"
3. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
Check.
Select.
4. The tool does not move even though the “AXIS6” on the cell window is clicked. If you
click around the vertex of the BOX, however, the tool moves to the vertex. This is
because the [Frame] check box in the OLP dialog box has been cleared and only models are considered for selection.
Clicking of the AXIS6
does not move the tool.
5. Check the [Frame] check box for the “Pick Object” and clear the [Model] check box.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
Uncheck.
Check
6. Click on the AXIS6, and the tool moves to the vertex of the AXIS6.
SUPPLEMENT

It is recommended to use this function with both [Frame] and [Parts] checked for normal
operation.
Changing of Operation Object
Setting the "Operation Object" section in the OLP dialog box allows changing the object
moved by the pick operation. The "Operation Object" can be changed among.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
The operation object of
when "CurModel" is selected
The operation object of
when "Teacher" is selected
Procedure
The procedure is explained by taking “CurModel” as an example.
1. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
2. Display the CadTree to select "DAI", or click on the
button to select the "DAI"
model in the cell window.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
3. Select a model for the operation object.
• When the current model was selected with the Cad Tree
Click on the tool end in the cell window with the mouse, and the “DAI” moves to the
tool end.
• When the current mode was selected with the
button
Check the [OLP Pick] check box, then click on the tool end on the cell window, and
the “DAI” moves to the tool end.
Click here.
SUPPLEMENT

Perform the same operation when the [Teacher] radio button is selected for the “Operation
Obj” section.
Move to External Reference Point
When the Move to External Reference Point function is active, the robot will move so that the
point clicked on a model (carried by the robot) is brought to the external reference point.
This is useful for applications like sealing and spot welding where the parts are handled by the
robot and brought to a fix point (distribution nozzle, spot gun) for processing.
Procedure
The procedure is explained by using the "SpotWeld.cel" as an example.
1. Open the "SpotWeld.cel" located in the "Example/NX100" folder.
(1) Display the "CadTree" and expand the "base200" node.
(2) Select the "200w" model and set the display mode to "Model Only" so that the
model is visible.
(3) Then select the active robot as the "ES200N-G".
2. The cell display should now look like the one shown below.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
3.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Teaching] group, click the [OLP] button, the [OLP] dialog
appears. Click on the [More >>] button.
4. Set the external reference point.
With the "Select Model" mode
, select the "hite" model by clicking on it.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
Click here
(model:hite)
To set the external reference point, click on the [Select Reference] button, the [Select
Model] dialog will display, select the "hite" model and press [OK].
The name of the selected reference model is displayed in the "Move to External Ref.
Point" section. Confirm that the "hite" model is selected.
5. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
チェック
選択
チェック
6. Click on the work piece at the shown position.
Click here.
7. The robot will move the work piece target point to the external reference point.
NOTE To use the "Move to External Reference Point" mode, the "Operation Object" needs to be
set to robot.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function

Synchronous Base Axis Move to Target Point
When a robot with servotrack/servotracks is moved with the OLP, the synchronous base axis
move function allows the tool end (TCP) to move to the target point with the servotrack
motion.
This operation function procedure is explained separately for robots with a single servotrack
and robots with multiple servotracks.
Robot with Single Servotrack
Procedure
1. For the robot with a single servotrack, the move method can be selected among:
• Front movement;
• Approach little by little; and
• Middle of attainment and front.
2. Select the [Active] check box in the “Synchronous base axis move” .
Check.
Displays the selected move method.
3. Click on the [Method] in the OLP dialog box to display the “Synchronous base axis
movement” dialog box, and set the move method.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
Select the move method.
Input only when the
[Middle of attainment
and front] radio button
is selected.
Front Movement
The function enabled with the [Front movement] radio button allows the tool end to move to
the target point after the servotrack moves in front of the target point.
Aimed point
After move
Moving distance
Procedure
1. Select the [Front movement] radio button in the “Synchronous base axis movement”
dialog box.
Select.
2. Click on the target point.
• If the target point exceeds the servotrack soft limit, a message is displayed and the
servotrack moves to the soft limit.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point, an error message is displayed
but the servotrack moves in front of the target point.
Approach Little by Little
The function enabled with the [Approach little by little] radio button allows the servotrack to
move only the distance between the target point and the position of the current tool end
(TCP), then the tool end (TCP) moves to the target point. In short, the servotrack and the tool
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
end (TCP) move so that the current robot posture is maintained as much as possible.
Aimed point
 Distance to
aimed point
After
move
The robot moves
the distance 
Procedure
1. Select the [Approach little by little] radio button in the “Synchronous base axis movement” dialog box.
Select.
2. Click on the target point.
• If the target point exceeds the servotrack soft limit, a message is displayed and the
servotrack moves to the soft limit.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point, an error message is displayed
but the servotrack moves in front of the target point.
Middle of Attainment and Front
The function enabled with the [Middle of attainment and front] radio button allows the servotrack to move toward the target point step by step to search for the first position where the tool
end (TCP) can attain the target point. The servotrack then moves to the middle point between
the first attainment and the front of the target point, and the tool end (TCP) moves to the target
point.
Target point
After
move
The robot moves in the direction
of the target point step by step.
The first attainment
Front of the
Middle target point
point
Procedure
1. Select the [Middle of attainment and front] radio button in the “Synchronous base axis
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
movement” dialog box. In the “STEP” edit box, set the moving amount for each step
taken toward the target point.
Select.
Sets the interval
to search for the
aimed point.
2. Click on the target point.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point even though the servotrack
moves in front of the target point, the attainment is searched with the servotrack
moving in such a direction that the target point will be further (up to the maximum
soft limit) than the servotrack position before moving.
 Searches for
the attainment.
The original
position
 Searches
again.
Target point
In front of the
target point
 The end tool
does not reach
the aimed point.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point, an error message is displayed
and the servotrack returns to the original position before moving.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point because the servotrack moves
to the middle point between the first attainment and the front of the target point, the
attainment is searched again with the servotrack moving in such a direction that the
target point will be further than the middle point.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
 Moves to the middle point.
Target point
 Searches for
the attainment.
The original position
 The first
attainment
 Searches
again.
The end tool
does not
reach the
target point.
In front of the
target point
Robot with Multiple Servotracks
For the robot with multiple servotracks, each servotrack moves the distance between the current tool end (TCP) position and the target point, and the tool end (TCP) moves to the target
point.
Moving distance of
the third servotrack
Moving distance of
the second servotrack
Aimed point
Moving distance of
the first servotrack
After move
Procedure
1. Select the [Active] check box in the “Synchronous base axis move”. For the multiple
servotracks, the servotrack move methods cannot be selected since only one method
is available.
HW0483092
11.1 Teaching Using OLP Function
Select.
2. Click on the target point.
• If the target point exceeds the servotrack soft limit, a message is displayed and the
servotrack moves to the soft limit.
• If the tool end (TCP) does not reach the target point, a message is displayed but the
servotracks move the distance to the target point.
HW0483092
11.2 User Frame Setting
11.2 User Frame Setting
MotoSim EG can set user frames that allows users to teach on workpiece slant face
easily.
On a horizontally placed workpiece, teaching a position such as (X, Y)=(300, 300) along the
face from a certain vertex can easily be performed by using the Programming Pendant dialog
box and other functions. But how about teaching a slant face? With the robot frame axis, it is
difficult to calculate (or teach) a frame along the slant face from a vertex. In such a case, use
a user frame to teach the frame easily along the slant face.
This section describes the simplified teaching of the workpiece slant face by using a user
frame.
Procedure
1. Create a workpiece (BOX) located at a slant by using the Cad Tree.
Model: WORK_UF (Parent model: world)
Width (W)
500
Depth (D)
500
Height (H)
50
X (mm)
0
Y (mm)
0
Z (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Rz (degree)
0
0
Z (mm)
[Layout]
X (mm)
780
Y (mm)
Rx (degree)
-20
Ry (degree)
-20
Rz (degree)
800
0
HW0483092
11.2 User Frame Setting
2. Select {Robot} - {Data Setting} - {Set User Frame...}.
In this example, the OLP function is used to describe the operation although you may
manually input the frame-axis data of the user frame.
Click on
, or select {Tool} - {Teaching} - {OLP...}.
3. Set each item in the OLP dialog box as shown in the following figure.
Check.
Select.
•
HW0483092
11.2 User Frame Setting
4. Set the [UFRAME] to “1” and select the [OO] radio button in the “PULSE” section.
Select the
[OO] radio
button.
Select "1".
5. Click on the vertex of the workpiece displayed in the cell window to move the robot tool
to the vertex.
Click here.
6. With the tool end in position, click on the [Register Pulse] button in the Calculate User
Frame dialog box.
Sets the pulse data.
Registers the pulse.
HW0483092
11.2 User Frame Setting
7. Click on the position of the workpiece in the cell window as shown in the figure below.
Click here.
8. Select the [OX] radio button in the Calculate User Frame dialog box, and click on the
[Register Pulse] button.
Select the [OX] radio button.
Sets the pulse data.
9. Click on the position of the workpiece in the cell window as shown in the following figure.
Click here.
HW0483092
11.2 User Frame Setting
10. Select the [OY] radio button in the Calculate User Frame dialog box, and click on the
[Register Pulse] button.
Select [OY].
Sets the pulse data.
11. Verify that values are entered in the edit boxes [OO], [OX], and [OY], and click on the
[Calc User Frame] button. The frame as shown in the figure below is displayed on the
workpiece.
Display with the workpiece hidden
Newly set user frame
HW0483092
11.2 User Frame Setting
12. Click on
or select {Tool} - {P.Pendant} - {P.Pendant View} to display the Programming Pendant dialog box.
Select the [User] radio button and set the combo box located below the [User] radio
button to “1” for the user frame No. With this setting, the coordinate system to move to
robot with the X, Y and Z keys of the Programming Pendant dialog box becomes the
coordinate system of the user frame 1.
Select here.
Select "1".
13. Use the Programming Pendant diagram box to move along the X and Y axes, and the
tool moves along the slant.
HW0483092
11.2 User Frame Setting

Moving with a User Frame
The following describe how to move the tool to the position: (X, Y) = (300, 300) from the vertex
of the user frame.
Procedure
1. 1.Click on the [Position] button of the Programming Pendant dialog box and then in the
[Frame] combobox select "User". Select the desired user frame number in the combobox that appears next to the [Frame] combobox.
Programming Pendant Dialog Box
Position Data Panel
2. Set each value in the User#1 dialog box. In this example, set the values: X=300,
Y=300, Z=0.
3. In the cell window, the tool moves to the coordinates: (X, Y) = (300, 300) on the slant
workpiece.
The position: X=300,
Y=300
As described above, teaching can easily be performed with user frame, in situation otherwise difficult.
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
11.3 Trace Function
11.3.1
Changing Trace Object
The object normally traced is the tool end, however, the trace object can be changed.
The trace object is changed to the flange in the following explanation.
Procedure
The procedure is explained with the “Arc_Samp_Nx.cel” example.
1. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Trace] button, the [Trace] dialog appears.
The "Trace Manager" dialog will appear. Trace can be added, edited or deleted. For
this example, the default trace will be edited.
2. Display the trace property by double clicking on the "HP6-RB1-trace1" or by pressing
the "Edit" button. Press the [...] next to the "Model" field to display the "Select Object"
dialog and select the model to be traced. For this example, select the "HP6_flange"
model. Then click on the [OK] button. Make sure that the "Model" edit box shows the
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
selected model name and click on the [OK] button.
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
3. Execute a job.
On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Start] button.
Flange tracing
The following figure shows when the tracing point is a tool.
Tool end tracing
11.3.2
Changing Trace Parent
The tracking drawn by the trace function is normally created and drawn as a model having
"world" as the parent. Therefore, changing the name of the “Parent” in the Trace Configuration dialog box will change the parent of the tracking. This parent changing function is useful
in the following cases:
• Tracing welding point positions when the robot holds and moves a workpiece to a fixed
welding points.
• Points to be traced are set to welding points.
Procedure
The procedure is explained with the “Arc_Samp_Nx.cel” example.
1.
On the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree] button, the [Cad Tree] dialog appears. To hide the "WORK" which is located on "DAI", select "WORK" to set it to
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
"Hide".
2. Select “world” from the Cad Tree and click on the [Add] button to create the
“YOUSETU” model.
3. Add the “CONE2” model to “YOUSETU”.
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
The following figures show “CONE2” and the layout setting.
Set the layout so that the basic
coordinates come to this position.
YOUSETU
4. Create the “WORK3” model that has “TCP” as the parent.
Select “HP6_tcp” from the Cad Tree, then click on the [Add] button.
Create "WORK3" on TCP.
5. Add the “BOX” model to “WORK3”.
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
Set the BOX as follows.
WORK3
6. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Trace] button, the [Trace] dialog appears.
7. Display the trace property by double clicking on the "HP6-RB1-trace1" or by pressing
the "Edit" button. Press the [...] next to the "Model" field to display the "Select Model"
dialog and select the model to be traced. For this example, select the "YOUSETU"
model. Then click on the [OK] button. Make sure that the "Model" edit box shows the
selected model name.
8. Press the [...] next to the "Parent" field to display the "Select Model" dialog and select
the model that will become the parent (and the reference coordinate frame) of the
trace. For this example, select the "WORK3" model. Then click on the [OK] button.
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
Make sure that the "Parent" edit box shows the selected model name.
9. The "Max. Points" field defines the maximum number of points that will be used by the
trace, this affect the length of the trace. (If the number of tracing points exceeds the set
value, tracing points are deleted in order from the oldest.) In this example, set the value
to 2000.
10. The “Color” field displays the color of the trace. Set any desired color by pressing the
[...] button next to the color.
11. Click on the [OK] button to save the setting.
12. To create a new job, on the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job] button
to display Select Job dialog box.
13. Display the Programming Pendant dialog box to create a job which welds four corners
of a workpiece as shown in the following figure. Teach the positions of each STEP with
HW0483092
11.3 Trace Function
MOVL instructions.
Initial State Viewed from Side
STEP 1
Initial State Viewed from Front
STEP 2
STEP 4
STEP 3
STEP 5
14. Execute the job and the tracing track attached to “WORK3” will be displayed. This
helps to see which positions on the workpiece are to be welded.
As described above, changing the trace object and the parent with the Trace Configuration dialog box can leave the moving track of the target point that can be easily read.
HW0483092
11.4 Collision Detection Setting
11.4 Collision Detection Setting
This section explains to set up the collision detection and check the collision on the playback
by using "Arc_Samp_Nx.cel" as an example.
Follow the flowchart below to set up the collision detection.
Collision model group registration
Collision definition registration
Start collision detection

Collision model group registration
Procedure
1. On the [Simulation] tab, in the [Collision] group, click the [Collision Detection] button,
the [Collision Detection] dialog appears.
2. Click the [ModelGroup] button on the Collision Detection dialog box, the Collision
Model Group dialog box is displayed.
3. Click the [Add] button on the Collision Model Group dialog box, the Collision Model
Group Detail dialog box is displayed.
HW0483092
11.4 Collision Detection Setting
4. Enter the collision model group name to [Model Group], display the [CadTree] dialog
box, and select the "DAI" in the CadTee dialog box.
Check the [A child model is also registered simultaneously] and click the [Add from
CadTree] button, "DAI" and "WORK" is added to the model list. Click the [OK] button to
save.
5. Click again the [Add] button on the Collision Model Group dialog box. Enter the collision model group name to [Model Group], display the [CadTree] dialog box, and select
the "Toch" in the CadTee dialog box. Click the [OK] button to save.

Collision definition registration
1. Click the [Add] button on the Collision Detection dialog box, the Collision Definition dialog box is displayed.
HW0483092
11.4 Collision Detection Setting
2. Enter "PAIR1" to the [Pair Name], Set Attribute of "TORCH" as "Master" and set attribute of "WORK" as "Slave". Click the [Register] button to save.

Start collision detection
1. Check the "PAIR1" check box on the Collision Detection dialog box, and check the
[Collision Check] check box.
2. To execute the job, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Start] button. When the collision occurs, the models turn red, and playback is stopped.
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
This section describes how to simulate a cell when multiple robots are registered.
11.5.1
Simultaneous Playback of Multiple Robot Jobs
Procedure
The procedure is explained by taking two robots as an example.
1. Create a new cell and place the robots as shown below.
• Cell name
• Robot model (common in both)
• The 1st robot name
• The 1st robot position
• The 2nd robot name
• The 2nd robot position
: TWIN
: HP6-A00
: HP6-A
: X = 0, Y = 700, Z = 450
: HP6-B
: X = 0, Y = -700, Z = 450
2. Create a job for “HP6-A”.
Simply click on the down arrow of
to display the list of robots and
select "HP6-A".
3. To create a new job "HP6-A", on the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
Job] button to display Select Job dialog box.
Enter “HP6-A”.
4. On the [Robot] tab, in the [VPP] group, click the [Show] button to display the programming pendant dialog box. Confirm that the top of Programming Pendant dialog box
shows "HP6-A.JBI", then create any desired job
Confirm that the title
bar shows “HP6-A.JBI”.
5. Create a job for "HP6-B".
Simply click on the down arrow of
to display the list of robots and
select "HP6-B".
6. To create a new job "HP6-B", on the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
Job] button to display Select Job dialog box.
Enter “HP6-B”.
7. Create any desired job for the robot "HP6-B" in the same manner as "HP6-A". To create a new job "HP6-B", on the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job] button to display Select Job dialog box for the "HP6-B" robot.
8. Click on
then
to execute jobs.
Two robots start executing each job at the same time.
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
11.5.2
Selection of Simulation Robots
In the case that more than one robot is provided, the robots active for simulation can be
selected with the “Stage-Master” function.
Procedure
1. On the [Simulator] tab, in the [Playback] group, click the [Stage Master] button, the
[Stage Master] dialog appears.
2. Select a robot to be simulated.
Select a robot to be simulated.
3. Click on the [OK] button to close the Stage-Master function. Click on
then
to execute jobs. Only the robot selected in the Stage Master will execute its job.
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
11.5.3
Synchronization between Robots
When a series of operation is performed by multiple robots, the robot actions may be synchronized.
Synchronization between robots is achieved by monitoring I/O signals. In the following example, “HP6-B” is set to start moving once “HP6-A” finishes its operation.
The following shows the job flow charts.
HP6-A
HP6-B
Turns OT#(1) OFF.
Turns OT#(1) OFF.
Executes a job.
Waits until IN#(1) is turned ON.
Turns OT#(1) ON.
Executes a job.
Waits until IN#(1) is turned ON.
Turns OT#(1) ON.
Turns OT#(1) OFF.
Procedure
1. Simply click on the down arrow of
to display the list of robots and
select "HP6-A". On the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job] button to
display Select Job dialog box.
2. Double-click at “NOP” to display the JOB Edit dialog box.
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
3. Enter “DOUT OT#(1) OFF” in the edit box of the JOB Edit dialog box. Click on the [Add
Line] button.
Select the [Add Line]
radio button.
4. Add the following three lines after the last instruction.
DOUT OT#(1) ON
WAIT IN#(1)=ON
DOUT OT#(1) OFF
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
5. Simply click on the down arrow of
to display the list of robots and
select "HP6-B". On the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job] button to
display Select Job dialog box. Add the following three lines after "NOP".
DOUT OT#(1) OFF
WAIT IN#(1)=ON
6. Add the following line after the last instruction.
DOUT OT#(1) ON
7. Set I/O signals.
To display the Connection Setting dialog box, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [I/O Set-
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
tings] group, click the [Connection Setting] button, then select "HP6-A". Click on the
[Add] button of the Connection Setting dialog box to add two connections between the
robot and the sequencer.
Select "HP6-A".
Specify here.
Specify here.
8. Select “HP6-B” in the Connection Setting dialog box. Click on the [Add] button to add
two connections between the robot and the sequencer.
Specify here.
Select "HP6-B".
Specify here.
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
9. Add two connections in the sequencer as follows.
Specify here.
Specify here.
10. Click on the [OK] button.
11. Reset the cell and execute the jobs. Display an I/O Monitor and a Programming Pendant for each robot. This may help you to read the sequence more easily.
HW0483092
11.5 Simulation of Multiple Robots
12. Execute a job and “HP6-A” starts moving first. “HP6-A” turns OT#(1) ON. When “HP6A” comes to the waiting status, IN#(1) is turned ON and “HP6-B” starts moving.
HW0483092
11.6 External Axes Setting
11.6 External Axes Setting
When a parameter file defines a robot with external axes, MotoSim EG internally creates the
required external servotrack and external rotating axis in accordance with the parameter setting when the cell is opened.
11.6.1
External Rotating Axis
If parameters are set as a robot with external rotating axis, MotoSim EG internally creates a
rotating axis frame model under the name of “robot name_ex1 (for the first axis on the external
turntable)” once the cell is opened.
For the second and third axes, the frame models are created under the name of “robot
name_ex2” and “robot name_ex3” respectively; all the axes that follow are provided with
names in the same way.
If any model rotates together with rotation of the rotating axis, register the model with the following procedure.
Procedure
1. The parent model of rotating axes is set to “world” by default. First, register a dummy
model to facilitate positioning, then place this model in any position on the world
frames.
When creating a new model, check the [Dummy Model] check box of the Add Model
dialog box to create the dummy model.
2. Change the parent model of the rotating axis (rotating axis base model) which is set to
"world" to the dummy model (e.g. Dummy) to facilitate positioning with the "Move Parent" function.
HW0483092
11.6 External Axes Setting
3. Create a model to be rotated and register the parent model as a rotating axis.
"dummy" model
world
External rotating axis
dum
Model to be rotated
HP6_ex1
work
11.6.2
External Servotrack
If parameters are set as a robot with external servotracks, the MotoSim EG internally creates
a servotrack frame model under the name of “robot name_ex1 (for the first servotrack)” once
the cell is opened.
If any model moves together with the servotrack, register its parent model as an external servotrack.
world
Base (fixed part) model
HP6
External servotrack
base
Table (movable part) model
HP6_ex1
table
Robot model
HP6_rm
HW0483092
11.7 Simulation of Non-Robot Models
11.7 Simulation of Non-Robot Models
11.7.1
Simulation of Non-Robot Models
MotoSim EG can also perform operation simulation of models other than robot models by
using the following keywords in INFORM (robot language) comments. These simulations are
useful for handling, palletizing, etc.
For model names which are used in the following comments, models can be designated not
only by the usual model names but also by specifying variable values. The variable names to
be used as part of the model names are indicated in [ ] to distinguish them from the usual
model names.
Example) WORK_[I000] : If I000 is 1, it is recognized as "WORK_001".
 Model Copy 1
Notation
‘MDL:DUP M1 M2
Meaning
Copies (duplicates) the model M1 to create M2.
Note
If MotoSim EG is closed without deleting the copied model, the description
(information on arrangement, etc.) is written in to the cell.
The copied model will reference the same model data file (.mdl) as the
original model.
 Model Copy 2
Notation
‘MDL:REF M1 M2
Meaning
Copies (references) the model M1 to create M2.
Note
If MotoSim EG is closed without deleting the copied model, the description
(information on arrangement, etc.) is not written in to the cell.
 Model Move 1
Notation
‘MDL:MOV M1 M2
Meaning
Moves the model M1 in the Cad Tree to change its parent to M2 without
changing the model location on the display. The model position from its
new parent is adjusted so that its location does not change in regards to
the world.
 Model Move 2
Notation
‘MDL:ADDX6 M1=10,20,30,0,0,0
Meaning
Moves the model M1. The position from the parent is changed by adding
(10,20,30,0,0,0) to the current position.
HW0483092
11.7 Simulation of Non-Robot Models
 Model Move 3
Notation
‘MDL:AXIS6 M1=10,20,30,0,0,0
Meaning
Moves the model M1. The position from the parent is changed to
(10,20,30,0,0,0).
 Model Deletion
Notation
‘MDL:DEL M1
Meaning
Deletes the model M1.
 Model Display
Notation
‘MDL:SEE M1
Meaning
Displays the model M1.
 Model Non-display
Notation
‘MDL:HID M1
Meaning
Hides the model M1.
NOTE
These simulations are valid only in the playback mode.
HW0483092
11.7 Simulation of Non-Robot Models
11.7.2
Translational Motion Setting for External Rotating Axis
The MotoSim EG allows you to set an external rotating axis of a robot so that the external
rotating axis moves in a translational motion like for a servo gun, etc.
The following procedure describes an example to set the external rotating axis as the cylinder
of a spot gun. (In this example, the setting for the spot gun cylinder is assumed to be completed.)
Refer to " 11.6.1 External Rotating Axis " for the external axis settings.
Procedure
1. Open a cell file with Notepad (or similar text editor) to define the robot settings in a
block of “CELL_INIT” command. The following shows an example.
Manipulator
{
TASK=LINER32.DLL ROBOT=ES165N LINK=6 FUNCA1=1.0 FUNCA2=100.0 FUNCB=0.0 MODEL=YASKAWA AXIS6NO=2
}
• TASK
: LINER32.LL
• ROBOT
: Name of the robot with external rotating axes
• LINK
: Axis No. for the robot with external rotating axes (begins with 0.)
E.g. The LINK is “6” in the case that the first external rotating
axis is set to operate as the cylinder of a spot gun under
the robot name “ES165N”.
• FUNCA1
: Moving amount (mm) to the standard pulse amount
• FUNCA2
: Standard pulse amount (pulse)
How to calculate values of FUNCA1 and FUNCA2
[For a ball-screw driven axis]
Ball screw pitch ×
Speed reduction ratio (numerator)
1
FUNCA1
×
=
Speed reduction ratio (denominator)
Feedback PPR
FUNCA2
[For a rack & pinion driven axis]
π × Pinion diameter ×
1
Speed reduction ratio (numerator)
FUNCA1
×
=
Feedback PPR
Speed reduction ratio (denominator)
FUNCA2
(Note: Y=(A1/A) ∗ X+B)
• FUNCB
: Initial moving amount (mm)
• MODEL
: Name of the model to be moved
• AXIS6 NO
: Direction to move (0: X, 1:Y, 2:Z)
HW0483092
11.7 Simulation of Non-Robot Models
2. On the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job] button to display Select Job
dialog box. Select the [Ext (external axis)] radio button.
Select the [Ext]
radio button.
Check the [Mpl]
check box.
3. Move the robot and spot gun cylinder portion to teach the target position, then create a
job.
HW0483092
11.8 Station Coordination Function
11.8 Station Coordination Function
The Station Coordination function consists of job teaching and playback for station coordination job, an automatic environment construction function using a calibration file, a synchronized jog function, and a twin drive function.
This function can be used to construct and verify off-line teaching environment for arc welding
or similar application using external axis servo station.
11.8.1
Operational Flow
The following flowchart shows necessary steps to construct an environment for the station
synchronous motion.
System Construction
Job Creation
Teaching
Linking Jog Operation
Playback
11.8.2
System Construction
After creating a new cell and registering a robot, build an external axis as a station.
Refer to " 7.4.3 Robot Calibration Setting " for detailed procedure.
HW0483092
11.8 Station Coordination Function
11.8.3
Job Creation
Procedure
To display the Select dialog box, on the [Robot] tab, in the [Job] group, click the [Select Job]
button.
Enter a new job name in the edit box and select a control group from the [CtrlG] combo box.
Then click on the [OK] button.
NOTE
A control group of existing jobs cannot be modified. Create a new job.
11.8.4
Teaching
MOVE Instruction

MOVE instructions are taught in the same way as ordinary teaching except that SMOVL and
SMOVC are added to the regular type of MOVE instructions that can be selected in the interpolation dialog box.
Control Group
R1
S1
R1+S1
MOVJ C0000 VJ=50.00
MOVJ EC0000 VJ=50.00
R1+S1:S1
(means S1 master.)
MOVJ C000 VJ=50.0 +MOVJ EC000 VJ=50.0*1
NONE
*1
*2
Display of MOVE Instructions
MOVJ C000 VJ=50.0 +MOVJ EC000 VJ=50.0*1
SMOVL C000 V=500.0 +MOVJ EC000*2
Any MOVE instruction cannot be taught by a job.
If MOVJ+MOVJ is used to set the speed for the robot and the station individually, double-click the MOVE instruction to change the desired speed.
MOVJ C000 VJ=50.0 +MOVJ EC000 VJ=80.0
The station speed for the SMOVL and SMOVC instructions cannot be specified.
HW0483092
11.8 Station Coordination Function
11.8.5
Synchronized Jog Operation
A synchronized Jog operation is a motion where the robot (slave) is moved by following the
station (master) when the master is moved. This function is used to hold the relative position
of the robot with the station. However, if the slave side is moved, the master side does not
move.
Procedure
1. Display the Programming Pendant dialog box.
2. Check the [Sjog] check box then select the station to be linked with the robot.
3.Select the [Ext (external axis)] radio button to operate the external axis.
The robot starts moving in conjunction with the station.
Setting of
the station
NOTE
Perform the following operations to automatically update the relative position of the master
and the slave.
• Click on the MOVE instruction of a job.
• Move to the target position.
• Perform a JOG operation with any axis other than external axes.
11.8.6
Playback
Playback can be done in the same way as any standard procedure except that to make the
motion path easier to see, the motion path can be drawn on the station by using the trace configuration function to specify the top axis of the station as the parent model.
HW0483092
11.8 Station Coordination Function
11.8.7
Twin Drive Function
MotoSim EG supports the twin drive option. If this option enables the parameter file (All.prm),
the external axes of each station move in the same pulse count.
Item
Set Value
Function
FD35
1
Twin drive function option
The following “Extern” dialog box shows an example of a twin drive having two 2-axis stations.
The first external axis is linked to the second axis, and the third external axis is linked to the
fourth axis.
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function
The conveyor synchronization function consists of a conveyor simulation function, teaching
and playback function for conveyor synchronization jobs, a painting instruction editing function, and a spray model display function.
This function is used to construct and review offline teaching environment for painting applications.
11.9.1
Operation Flow
The following flowcharts briefly describe how the environment is constructed. The figure on
the right is an image of the process.
System Construction
Registration of robot
Registration of conveyor
Settings of conveyor characteristics
Settings for conveyor
synchronization conditions
Position of conveyor
Creation of workpiece model and
position of workpiece
Teaching
Operation of conveyor
Teaching of the conveyor
synchronization MOVE instruction
Editing of conveyor synchronization
START and END instructions
Playback
Playback of conveyor
synchronization job
Confirmation of path using pulse
record
Settings for spray model
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function
11.9.2
System Construction
This section describes how to construct an environment where a conveyor synchronization
job can be created after a new cell is created.
Registration of Robot

Register the robot according to the procedure described in " 7.1 Adding/Deleting a Robot ".
The robot to be registered must have the following option parameter settings (All.prm).
If these options are set properly, the painting function will operate correctly. (The PX series
parameters that are supplied with MotoSim EG are already set properly.)
Item
Set
Value
Function
FD20
1
Conveyor synchronization function option
S1D260
-
8
Permission of the SYMOVJ instruction
S3D249
S3D111
S1D240
16
SL function selection
S3D257
S3D257
S3D115
S1D244
1
Robot 1 SL selection
-
S3D227
S3D119
S1D247
4
Robot 1 application selection (painting)
FS100
YRC1000
DX200
DX100
NX100
XRC
FD20
FD20
FD20
-
-
S3D249
NOTE
When the robot’s location is changed, the user-frame’s position is also changed automatically. Update the conveyor’s location to return the user-frame’s position to the original
position.
Follow the procedure below to update the conveyor’s position:
1. Display the Cad Tree to select a conveyor.
2. Click on the [Pos] button to display the Position dialog box. Then, click on the [OK]
button and the user frame returns to its original position.

Registration of Conveyor
Refer to in " Registering a Conveyor " in " 10.1 Conveyor " to register a conveyor.

Settings for Conveyor Characteristics
Refer to " Editing a Conveyor " in " 10.1 Conveyor " to set the conveyor characteristics.

Settings for Conveyor Synchronization Conditions
Refer to " Setting the Conveyor Synchronization " in " 10.1 Conveyor " to set the conveyor
synchronization conditions.
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function

Layout of Conveyor
Procedure
1. To display the CadTree, on the [Home] tab, in the [Model] group, click the [CadTree]
button. Then select the conveyor model: "CONVEYOR-NO (CONVEYOR-NO1 in the
following example)."
2. Click on the [Pos] button to display the Layout dialog box. Then enter any desired
position for the conveyor.
3. When the conveyor is in the desired position, click on the [OK] button. Then, the robot
with the conveyor synchronization function automatically creates a user frame in the
new position of the conveyor with the user frame number corresponding to the conveyor number.
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function

Creation of Workpiece Model and Position of Workpiece
Place a workpiece on the conveyor
Procedure
1. Create a workpiece model with “conveyor name_TCP” as the parent.
2. Place the workpiece on the side opposite to the mark  along the line as shown in the
following figure. The mark  indicates the direction in which the conveyor advances.
When this line passes the conveyor's home position (or if SYSTART instruction specifies STP, when this line passes the position specified by the STP), synchronization of
the conveyor starts.
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function
11.9.3

Teaching
Operation of Conveyor
Two methods to operate the conveyor are available:
• To operate a conveyor with a single axis.
• To operate a conveyor with any number of axes.
Operating a Single-Axis Conveyor
1. To display the Conveyor Operation Panel dialog box, on the [Robot] tab, in the [External Device] group, click the [Conveyor Operation Panel] button. Then select/enter any
numerical value in the "Position(mm)" combo box to move the conveyor position, and
adjust the workpiece position so that the robot can easily be taught.
Conveyor Operation Panel
Item
[Conveyor Power On]
check box
NOTE
Description
Enables verification of conveyor in halt status when clearing the check
box during the playback.
The “Position(mm)” of the “Conveyor Operation Panel” dialog box shows the conveyor’s
position where the LS offset value, which is set to each robot is reflected. Therefore, if
the current robot is changed, the settings in the “Position(mm)” combo box may also be
changed, although the conveyor on the display does not move.
Operating a Multi-Axis Conveyor
1. Select a conveyor from the combo box
the window.
located in the upper left of
2. Move the conveyor with the position data panel, and adjust the workpiece position so
that the robot can be easily taught.
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function
Teaching of Conveyor Synchronization MOVE Instruction
(SYMOVJ, SYMOL, SYMOVC)

Procedure
1. Select a robot from the combo box
window.
located in the upper left of the
2. Display the Job Panel or Programming Pendant dialog box.
3. Click on the [Move...] button to display the Interpolation dialog box. Select the synchronization MOVE instruction (SYMOVJ, SYMOVL, or SYMOVC) and the number of the
conveyor to be synchronized.
4. Move the robot to the taught position. Select the [Add] radio button and click on the
[Enter] button, and the following instructions are added.
SYMOVJ C0002 BC0002 VJ=80.00 CV#(1) CTP=-500.000
(CTP is the conveyor position at teaching (mm).)
5. Check the [Sync] check box and move the cursor to each step, and the position of conveyor to be synchronized also moves to the registered position. To teach the job while
frequently changing the conveyor position, it is recommended to clear the [Sync] check
box.
Editing of Conveyor Synchronization START and END Instructions

1.
To use the Job Editor functions, on the [Tool] tab, in the [Teaching Assistance] group,
click the [Execute JobEditor] button.
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function
2. The Job Editor starts.
3. Move the cursor to the position where synchronization starts. Double-click a line number to display the Select Inst dialog box to add instructions. Then select SENSOR
instruction group and add an SYSTART instruction.
4. Move the cursor to the position where synchronization ends, and add an SYEND
instruction.
5. Save the job.
6. Exit the Job Editor. The MotoSim EG operation cannot be performed unless exiting the
Job Editor.
NOTE
• If the Job Editor is not installed, this function cannot be used. If so, use MotoSim EG to
add START/END instructions.
• If a TIMER or WAIT instruction is used during conveyor synchronization, the robot’s TCP
moves as if it were fixed on a single point on the conveyor.
HW0483092
11.9 Conveyor Synchronization Function
11.9.4

Playback
Playback of Conveyor Synchronization Job
The following dialog box appears after a job is carried out. The play time of the whole line is
displayed on “MAX”.

Confirmation of Path Using Pulse Record
When carrying out a job, on the [Simulation] tab, in the [Monitor] group, click the [Pulse
Record] button to display the Pulse Record dialog box. Even after the playback, the path of
robot motion on a workpiece can be examined in detail. Furthermore, click on the [Save] button to record the pulse record in a text file. To read the saved pulse record again, click on the
[Load] button.

Settings for Spray Model
Refer to " 8.3.4 Paint Setting " for settings for spray model.
11.9.5
Conveyor Soft Limit Setting Function
Refer to " Setting the Soft Limit " in " 10.1 Conveyor " for conveyor soft limit settings.
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
11.10Handling
As a handling example, a robot grips three boxes from the floor one by one using the tool, and
pile them up in a different location. One of the important operation of this procedure is to
change the model parent.
Procedure
1. Create a new cell to place a robot as shown below.
• Cell name
• Parameter
• Robot name
• Robot model file
: Hand_smp
: HP6-A00
: HP6-A00
: HP6-A00.mdl
2. Mount a tool on the robot.
If a hand model (sample model) is already supplied, use this model or create a new
model based on the following data.
<When Using the Sample Model>
1) Select the sample model in the Explorer. Drag and drop the sample model on
the cell window. Click on the [Yes] button when the MotoSimEG dialog box
appears.
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
2) The Select Object dialog box appears. Select “HP6-A00_flange”, then click on
the [OK] button.
3) Click on the [Yes] button when the MotoSimEG dialog box appears.
4) The tool is mounted on the robot.
5) Set the Z-axis of the tool data adjusting it to the tool position.
<When Creating a Tool Model>
Select “HP6_flange” in the model tree dialog box and click on the [Add] button to set
the model name and the model file name. Then create a model according to the parts
data as follows.
• Model name: hand
• File name: hand
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
• Parts data:
CYLINDER
Upper Dia.
60
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Lower Dia.
60
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Height
30
Z (mm)
0
Rz (degree)
0
Upper Dia.
80
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Lower Dia.
80
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Height
30
Z (mm)
30
Rz (degree)
0
Upper Dia.
100
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Lower Dia.
100
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Height
20
Z (mm)
64
Rz (degree)
0
Upper Dia.
200
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Lower Dia.
200
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Height
30
Z (mm)
64
Rz (degree)
0
Upper Dia.
160
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Lower Dia.
10
Y (mm)
90
Ry (degree)
0
Height
200
Z (mm)
150
Rz (degree)
0
Upper Dia.
160
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Lower Dia.
10
Y (mm)
-90
Ry (degree)
0
Height
200
Z (mm)
150
Rz (degree)
0
CYLINDER
BOX
BOX
BOX
BOX
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
6) Create three workpieces to be gripped by the tool. Add "WORK1", "WORK2"
and "WORK3" models below the "world" in the model tree.
7) Add a BOX model to each workpiece. Setting AXIS6 may also be helpful.
work1: BOX
Width
160
X (mm)
300
Rx (degree)
0
Length
170
Y (mm)
900
Ry (degree)
0
Height
200
Z (mm)
100
Rz (degree)
0
Width
160
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
0
Length
170
Y (mm)
900
Ry (degree)
0
Height
200
Z (mm)
100
Rz (degree)
0
Width
160
X (mm)
-300
Rx (degree)
0
Length
170
Y (mm)
900
Ry (degree)
0
Height
200
Z (mm)
100
Rz (degree)
0
X (mm)
300
Rx (degree)
180
Y (mm)
900
Ry (degree)
0
Z (mm)
200
Rz (degree)
90
work2: BOX
work3: BOX
work1: AXIS6
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
work2: AXIS6
X (mm)
0
Rx (degree)
180
Y (mm)
900
Ry (degree)
0
Z (mm)
200
Rz (degree)
90
X (mm)
-300
Rx (degree)
180
Y (mm)
900
Ry (degree)
0
Z (mm)
200
Rz (degree)
90
work3: AXIS6
8) Set the tool data as follows.
9) Prepare a stand where workpieces are to be piled up. Add "DAI" model with
"world" as parent. Also set an AXIS6 for the position where workpieces are to be
piled up. The AXIS6 should be set to the upper surface of the piled workpieces
of when the workpieces are put on the “DAI”.
DAI: BOX
Width
500
X (mm)
900
Rx (degree)
0
Length
500
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Height
100
Z (mm)
50
Rz (degree)
0
X (mm)
900
Rx (degree)
180
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Z (mm)
300
Rz (degree)
90
X (mm)
900
Rx (degree)
180
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Z (mm)
500
Rz (degree)
90
DAI: AXIS6(0)
DAI: AXIS6(1)
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
DAI: AXIS6(2)
X (mm)
900
Rx (degree)
180
Y (mm)
0
Ry (degree)
0
Z (mm)
700
Rz (degree)
90
10) At this stage, the cell should look like the one shown below.
11) Create a new job to pile up three workpieces under the name of "Hand.jbi."
12) Create a job that performs "workpiece gripping" and "workpiece dropping" three
times with the OLP panel using AXIS6 as the target point.
NOTE
Do not set the actual workpiece gripping operation, but only register each step to pile up
the workpieces (settings of operating).
13) Move the actual workpiece model by adding instructions*1 that makes the tool
seems to grip and pile the workpieces. For this operation, use the job display
panel of the Programming Pendant dialog box and double-click the step where
the robot moves to the position to grip "work1".
*1 “Instruction that makes the tool seem to grip and pile the workpieces” means: each
model has a parent model without exception. MotoSim EG is provided with instructions that describe Macros to change the parent model or hide the model. The annotated process, using this function, describes the process to make the tool grip
“work1”.
Double-click the step at position
where "work1" is gripped.
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
14) Use the JOB Edit dialog box to enter the code as shown in the figure below.
Select the [Add Line] radio button and click on the [OK] button. This code
changes the parent of “WORK1” to “hand”.
15) Enter the processing to put the "WORK1" is put on the "DAI".
Double-click the step where the job “WORK1” is put on “DAI” in the Programming
Pendant dialog box, then enter the code as shown below. This code changes the
parent of “WORK1” to “DAI”.
16) Add description: “MDL:MOV WORK???” after each step of “workpiece gripping”
and “workpiece putting” for the other two workpieces in the same manner as the
first one. Follow the same procedures as 14) and 15).
NOP
MOVJ C0000 VJ=100.00
MOVJ C0001 VJ=100.00
MOVL C0002 V=93.0
'MDL:MOV work1 hand
MOVL C0003 V=93.0
MOVJ C0004 VJ=100.00
MOVL C0005 V=93.0
'MDL:MOV work1 DAI
MOVL C0006 V=93.0
MOVJ C0007 VJ=100.00
MOVJ C0008 VJ=50.00
MOVL C0009 V=93.0
'MDL:MOV work2 hand
MOVL C0010 V=93.0
MOVJ C0011 VJ=100.00
MOVL C0012 V=93.0
'MDL:MOV work2 DAI
MOVL C0013 V=93.0
MOVJ C0014 VJ=100.00
HW0483092
11.10 Handling
MOVJ C0015 VJ=50.00
MOVL C0016 V=93.0
'MDL:MOV work3 hand
MOVL C0017 V=93.0
MOVJ C0018 VJ=100.00
MOVL C0019 V=93.0
'MDL:MOV work3 DAI
MOVL C0020 V=93.0
MOVJ C0021 VJ=100.00
END
17) If this job is executed, the operation completes with the workpiece-model parent
being changed to “DAI”, which will not be displayed properly when the job is performed again. To avoid this, create “init.jbi” for initialization and add the processing to return the parent of each workpiece model to “world” and call this job from
the main display “hand.jbi”.
“init.jbi”
NOP
'MDL:MOV work1 world
'MDL:AXIS6 work1=0,0,0,0,0,0
'MDL:MOV work2 world
'MDL:AXIS6 work2=0,0,0,0,0,0
'MDL:MOV work3 world
'MDL:AXIS6 work3=0,0,0,0,0,0
END
Absolute position from the parent is the position displayed by clicking the [Pos]
button in the model tree dialog box where the workpiece is set for the first time.
“hand.jbi”
NOP
CALL JOB:INIT
MOVJ C0000 VJ=100.00
:
:
END
18) Perform the job of "hand.jbi" from the top. Tool grips the workpieces and piles
them up on the "DAI."
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
11.11 Data Format
This section describes the formats of model data files and cell data files.

Model File (*.mdl)
There are eight parts available for MotoSim EG as described later in " Each Part Format " of
this section.
Data unit system is in millimeters (mm) and real numbers are available. Use decimal point as
required.
Model Color Settings
The color of each model can be set by using the basic color code function or using RGB.
The following describe each setting.
• RGB
RGB is created with the format RGB (0, 0, 0).
Each color proportion can be set by a number from 0 to 255.
RGB (0, 0, 0)
Sets the proportion of blue.
Sets the proportion of green.
Sets the proportion of red.
<E.g.>
RGB(255,255,255)
RGB(255,0,0)
RGB(0,255,0)
RGB(0,0,255)
RGB(0,0,0)
Color: White
Color: Red
Color: Green
Color: Blue
Color: Black
• Basic Color Code (QB Color) Function
Setting a number from 0 to 15 displays its corresponding color.
For example, setting BOX (4, 2) creates a red BOX model.
Number
Color
Number
Color
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Black
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Gray
Light blue
Light green
Light cyan
Light red
Light magenta
Light yellow
Light white
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
Each Part Format
• BOX (color, num): Box form model
Described with data of width, length, height, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
BOX(RGB(255,0,0),2)
{
100.000,100.000,100.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
}
}
Description
Width, length, height, 0, 0, 0
X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
• BOX2 (color, num): Box form model
Described with data of width, length, height, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
BOX2(RGB(255,0,0),2)
{
100.000,100.000,100.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
}
}
Description
Width, length, height, 0, 0, 0
X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
• CYLINDER (color, num): Cylinder form model
Described with data of lower face diameter, upper face diameter, height, number of
divided faces, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
CYLINDER(RGB(255,0,0),2)
Description
{
200.000,100.000,16.000,100.000,0.000,0.000 Lower face dia. height, No. of divided
faces, upper face dia., 0, 0
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
}
}
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
• CONE2 (color, num): Cone form model
Described with data of bottom diameter, height, number of divided faces, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry
and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
CONE2(RGB(255,0,0),2)
{
200.000,100.000,16.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
}
}
Description
Bottom dia., height, No. of divided faces,
0, 0, 0
X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
• SPHERE(color,num): Spherical model
Described with data of diameter, number of divided faces, X, Y and Z.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
SPHERE(RGB(255,0,0),2)
{
100.000,30.000,0,0,0,0
0.000,0.000,0.000,0,0,0
}
}
Description
Diameter, No.of devided face, 0, 0, 0, 0
X, Y, Z, 0, 0, 0
• PIPE2 (color, num): Pipe form model
Described with data of lower face diameter, bottom plate thickness, upper face diameter,
upper plate thickness, height, number of divided faces, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
PIPE2(RGB(255,0,0),2)
Description
{
100.000,100.000,100.000,10.000,100.000,16. Lower face dia., bottom plate thickness,
000
upper face dia., upper plate thickness,
height, No. of divided faces
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
}
}
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
• AXIS6 (color, num): Model having information only of position and posture
Described with data of X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry and Rz.
“num” sets the number of target points.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
AXIS6(RGB(255,0,0),3)
{
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
100.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
200.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
}
}
Description
Point1 (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz)
Point2 (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz)
Point3 (X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz)
• LINE(color,num): Continuous line model
Described with data of X, Y and Z.
"num" sets the number of points.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
LINE(RGB(255,0,0),3)
{
0.000,0.000,0.000
100.000,200.000,300.000
500.000,235.000,111.000
}
}
Description
Point1 (X, Y, Z)
Point2 (X, Y, Z)
Point3 (X, Y, Z)
• LINE2(color,num): Segmented line model
Described with data of X, Y and Z.
"num" sets the number of points.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
LINE2(RGB(255,0,0),4)
{
253.000,353.000,686.000
89.000,254.000,79.000
413.000,3.000,99.000
917.000,524.000,-48.000
}
}
Description
Segment 1 Start (X, Y, Z)
Segment 1 End (X, Y, Z)
Segment 2 Start (X, Y, Z)
Segment 2 End (X, Y, Z)
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
• CUBE (color, num): Polygonal cube model
Data of polygonal cube are described with data of bottom and height.
A rectangular parallelepiped is composed of four points and one height, therefore, num is
5 in this case.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
CUBE(RGB(255,0,0),5)
{
0.000,0.000,0.000
100.000,0.000,0.000
100.000,100.000,0.000
0.000,100.000,0.000
0.000,0.000,100.000
}
}
Description
Start point1 (X, Y, Z)(= End point 4)
End point1 (X, Y, Z)(= Start point 2)
End point2 (X, Y, Z)(= Start point 3)
End point3 (X, Y, Z)(= Start point 4)
Offset value (X, Y, Z)
• FLOOR (color, num): Floor form model
Describes a plane meshed data string.
Described with data of number of divided faces (vertical and horizontal) and frame data of
floor end point.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
FLOOR(RGB(255,0,0),3)
{
6.000,6.000,0.000
-1500.000,-3000.000,0.000
1500.000,3000.000,0.000
}
}
Description
No. of divided faces (X division No., Y
division No., 0)
Floor end point1 (X, Y, Z)
Floor end point2 (X, Y, Z)
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
• FACE (color, num): Face model
Describes a face with the frame data of X, Y, and Z of each point.
In this case the face model is composed of three points on the face and the data for X, Y,
Z, Rx, Ry and Rx, num is 4.
<Sample>
BLOCK
{
FACE(RGB(255,128,0),4)
{
0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000,0.000
200.000,300.000,300.000,3,0,0
-200.000,300.000,300.000,0,0,0
-200.000,300.000,-300.000,0,0,0
}
}
Description
X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz
Face is created with the following three
points.
Point1 (X, Y, Z)
Point2 (X, Y, Z)
Point3 (X, Y, Z)
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format

Cell File
When constructing a cell, a cell file is created. The following describe an example of a cell file.
CELL_INIT
{
VERSION=1, 0, 0, 0
ROBOT(0)
{
PATH=%CELPATH%\HP6-A00;
NAME=HP6-A00;
JOBNAME=DEFAULT.JBI;
TOOL=0;
CPULSE=0,0,0,0,0,0;
EPULSE=0,0,0,0,0,0ÅG
TCPFRAME4=1;
FLANGEFRAME4=0;
SAKIYOMIDELAY=0.000;
DRIVER=SEQDRV;
DRIVER=MODELDRV;
DRIVER=MOV;
DRIVER=TRACE(PARENT=world)(POINTS=1000);
DRIVER=HADRV;
DRIVER=RRS;
DRIVER=REPORTDRV;
}
STAGE
{
}
NSIMVIEW
{
BACKCOLORTOP=RGB(128,255,255);
BACKCOLORBOTTOM=RGB(255,255,255);
CAMERAPOSITION=8.167229,8.167229,2.792158;
CAMERATARGET=0.000000,0.000000,0.045000;
CAMERAUPVECTOR=-0.163618,-0.163618,0.972865;
USERVIEW
{
NO=0
CAMERAPOSITION=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERATARGET=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
CAMERAUPVECTOR=0.000000,0.000000,0.000000;
}
}
RTSVIEW
{
NO=0;
PARTITION=0;
FRAMELENGTH=100;
REFMODEL=world;
UnitOfLength=MILLIMETER;
LightAXIS6=0.000,0.000,0.000,-144.737,-45.000,180.000;
LightBrightness=0.699;
VIEW(0)
{
VSCALE=0.15;
ASPECT=1;
PANORAMA=0;
AXIS6=0,0,5000,180,0,0;
ORGAXIS6=0,0,5000,180,0,0;
DIRNO=0;
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
BACKCOLOR=RGB(255,255,128);
}
VIEW(1)
{
VSCALE=0.15;
ASPECT=0.721925;
PANORAMA=0;
AXIS6=5000,0,0,-90,0,90;
ORGAXIS6=5000,0,0,-90,0,90;
DIRNO=1;
BACKCOLOR=RGB(255,255,128);
}
VIEW(2)
{
VSCALE=0.15;
ASPECT=0.721925;
PANORAMA=0;
AXIS6=0,-5000,0,-90,0,0;
ORGAXIS6=0,-5000,0,-90,0,0;
DIRNO=2;
BACKCOLOR=RGB(255,255,128);
}
VIEW(3)
{
VSCALE=0.15;
ASPECT=0.721925;
PANORAMA=0;
AXIS6=2500,2500,1000,-100,0,135;
ORGAXIS6=2500,2500,1000,-100,0,135;
DIRNO=3;
BACKCOLOR=RGB(255,255,128);
}
}
UNIT
{
Length
{
VALUE=0.000,10000.000;
DIV=0,1000;
RATE=1.000000000,1.000000000;
STR=mm;
}
Position
{
VALUE=-10000.000,10000.000;
DIV=0,2000;
RATE=1.000000000,1.000000000;
STR=mm;
}
Angle
{
VALUE=-3600.000,3600.000;
DIV=0,720;
RATE=1.000000000,1.000000000;
STR=deg;
}
Weight
{
VALUE=0.000,10000.000;
DIV=0,1000;
RATE=1.000000000,1.000000000;
STR=kg;
}
}
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
}
MODEL_INIT
{
MODEL
{
NAME=FLOOR;
PARENT=world;
FILENAME=%CELPATH%\models\floor.mdl;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=0.50;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,0,0,0,0;
}
MODEL
{
NAME=worldframe;
PARENT=world;
FILENAME=dummy;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=256;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,0,0,0,0;
}
MODEL
{
NAME=Teacher;
PARENT=world;
FILENAME=dummy;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=256;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,0,0,0,0;
}
MODEL
{
NAME=HP6-A00;
PARENT=world;
FILENAME=%CELPATH%\HP6-A00\HP6-A00-MDL.mdl;
COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
SCALE=1.000000;
AXIS6=0,0,450,0,0,0;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_rm;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_link1;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_link2;
HIDESEE=1;
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_link3;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_link4;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_link5;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_link6;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_flange;
HIDESEE=1;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
MODEL_RB
{
NAME=HP6-A00_tcp;
HIDESEE=257;
OPACITY=1.00;
}
}
PAIR_INIT
{
}
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
1) ROBOT Command
The ROBOT command describes data concerning robots.
• VERSION=1, 0, 0, 0
Describes the MotoSim EG version.
• ROBOT(0)
Describes the ROBOT No. 0.
When more than one robot is used, the robots are provided with numbers ROBOT(0),
ROBOT(1), ROBOT(2) .
• PATH=%CELPATH%\HP6-A00;
Describes the directory path to which the ROBOT refers.
This directory needs a “All.prm” file. All jobs to be referred to must be stored here.
• NAME=HP6-A00;
Describes the name of the ROBOT.
• JOBNAME=DEFAULT.JBI;
Describes the job name to which the ROBOT of the cell refers.
• TOOL=0;
Describes the tool number to which the ROBOT of the cell refers.
• CPULSE=-0,0,0,0,0,0;
Describes the current value pulses of internal six axes to which are referred by the
ROBOT of the cell.
• EPULSE=0,0,0,0,0,0;
Describes the current value pulses of external six axes to which are referred by the
ROBOT of the cell.
• TCPFRAME4=1;
Describes that TCP (tool center point) is to be displayed.
• DRIVER=TRACE(PARENT=world)(POINTS=1000);
Describes that trace points are displayed at review (playback). Description of “(PARENT=world)” indicates that the PARENT is world. Since a trace point is considered as
one of MODELs, PARENT needs to be described. “(POINTS=1000)” indicates that the
maximum number of trace points is 1000.
2) STAGE Command
The STAGE command describes the internal connection of the STAGE object that works as a
sequencer for I/O simulation.
3) NSIMVIEW Command
The NSIMVIEW command describes data related to drawing.
4) RTSVIEW Command
The RTSVIEW command describes data related to drawing.
5) UNIT Command
The UNIT command describes data related to drawing.
HW0483092
11.11 Data Format
6) MODEL_INIT Command
The MODEL_INIT command describes data concerning models.
• MODEL
Describes a MODEL.
• NAME=HP6-A00;
Describes the name of the MODEL.
• PARENT=world;
Describes the PARENT model of the MODEL.
• FILENAME=%CELPATH%\HP6-A00\HP6-A00-MDL.mdl;
Describes the directory path and MODEL file name to which the MODEL refers.
If no MODEL file exists, "dummy" is described.
• COLOR=RGB(0,0,255);
Describes the color of the MODEL.
• HIDESEE=1;
Describes the display bit of the MODEL.
• OPACITY=1.00;
Describes the opacity of the MODEL.
• SCALE=1.000000;
Describes the scale factor of the MODEL.
• AXIS6=0,0,450,0,0,0;
Describes the relative coordinates to the MODEL PARENT.
7) Default Model
• world
Starting point for all models. It does not appear.
• worldframe
Displays the world position with a frame.
• Teacher
Displays a frame to create a target coordinate on any point.
• FLOOR
Displays world XY plane.
HW0483092
11.12 Remote Monitor Function
11.12 Remote Monitor Function
Validation of the robot running process with MotoSim EG by acquiring the robot current position from the real machine (only YRC1000, DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100 controller).
P o sition D ata
C ontroller w ith
E thernet S erver
M otoS im E G
Requirements to use the Remote Monitor Function with MotoSim EG.
• MOTOCOM32 (Hardware Lock Key)
The hardware lock key is necessary to execute the "Data Transmission" between the
computer and the robot controller. Without the key, the message "Hardware Key is missing" will display and the communication will not be established.
If you do not have a copy of MOTOCOM32, it is available separately.
• Controller Ethernet Server (Controller Option)
The "Ethernet Server Option" and the "Ethernet Option" are both required. If the controller doesn't have those options activated, they can be added separately.
• Communication Equipment (LAN cable and others)
The necessary equipment to built a physically LAN connection (Ethernet) between the
controller and the computer.
11.12.1 Preparation
1. In MotoSimEG, build a cell identical to the real system.
(Use the same data file as the real controller (ALL.PRM, TOOL.CND...)
2. Connect the computer to the controller with a LAN cable. For connection procedure,
please refer to the robot controller “Options Instructions For Data Transmission Function".
3. Open the "RemoteMonitor.ini" file located in MotoSimEG folder in the public document
folder (e.g. C:\Users\Public\Documents\MOTOMAN\MotoSimEG).
4. Edit the "RemoteMonitor.ini" file so that the values correspond to the value set on the
controller.
The following is an example of the "RemoteMonitor.ini" with explanation:
HW0483092
11.12 Remote Monitor Function
//NX NS3.30 or more for EServer
//MOTOCOM FILEVERSION:4.30 DATE:2006/01/27
NEWSIMULATOR ;
{
ControllerNumber = 1 ;
Controller(0) ;
{
Info="TEST" ;
//Comment Information
R1 = 6 ;
B1 = 0 ;
S1 = 0 ;
Timer = 150 ;
//ms
ConnectType = 2 ;
//0:Com 1:Ether 2:Eserver
ComSettings = 1,9600,2,8,0 ;
// Port,Baudrate,Parity,DataLen,StopBit
IpAddress = 192.168.255.1 ;
EserverMode =1 ;
//1:Normal -1:KeepAlive
}
}
Note: Disregard the comments after the //
• ControllerNumber=1
Indicates the number of controller used.
Note: At the present time, only one controller can be used. This value shouldn't be modified.
• Controller(0)
Definition of the controller 0 (1st controller).
Note: This value shouldn't be modified.
• Info="TEST"
Comment string to identify the controller information.
Note: Does not affect the Remote Monitor operation.
• R1=6
Defines the number of axis used by robot 1.
Values for R2, R3, R4 can also be set. (The default value is 0 axis)
Note: Refer to the "Robot and External Axis Handling"
• B1=0
Defines the number of base axis used by robot 1.
Values for B2, B3, B4 can also be set. (The default value is 0 axis)
Note: Refer to the "Robot and External Axis Handling"
• S1=0
HW0483092
11.12 Remote Monitor Function
Defines the number of station axis used by robot 1.
Values for S2, S3, S4 can also be set. (The default value is 0 axis)
Note: Refer to the "Robot and External Axis Handling"
• Timer=150
Defines acquisition interval (units: milliseconds) of the position values.
Note: If a small value then 150 is set, the interval is insufficient to acquire position values.
If this value is increased the refresh time in MotoSimEG becomes longer.
• ConnectType=2
Define the MOTOCOM32 communication type.
0 : FCom(Serial)jCommunication
1 : FEthernet Communication
2 : FEthernetServer Communication
Note: Normally does not need to be modify.
Note: If LAN cable connection is not possible, set this value to 0.
• ComSettings=1,9600,2,8,0
Serial Port Communication Settings (Port No, Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits).
Note: Normally does not need to be modify.
Note: Define the serial settings when the "ConnectType=0"
• IpAddress=192.168.255.1
Indicates the IP address of the controller.
Note: Indicate the exact IP address defined in the LAN network for the controller.
If an incorrect address is entered, the Remote Monitor will be unable to communicate with the controller.
• EServerMode=1
Indicates the Ethernet Server Mode
1 : Normal Mode
-1 : Exclusive Mode
Note: This value shouldn't be modified.

Robot and External Axis Handling
• The following combination of the control group for the robot and the external axis are
fixed. (For robot system with only one robot, R2, R3 and R4 equal 0.)
B1
R1
B2
B4
R4
R3
R2
S1
B3
S2
S3
S4
• Robot axis (Rx) should be set to 6 axis.
• The total external axis number (Bx+Sx) cannot exceed 6 axis.
HW0483092
11.12 Remote Monitor Function
11.12.2 Operation Procedure
1. To link to the controller and acquiring the current position data (Remote Monitor Link),
on the [Tool] tab, in the [Online] group, click the [Remote Monitor] button. After the connection is properly establish with the controller, the robot in the cell will move based on
the current position of the real robot and the following dialog will display.
NOTE
While the remote monitor is connected, please do not turn off the controller.
While the remote monitor is connected, except for viewpoint operations, MotoSim EG other
functions like Collision Check and Pulse Recorder functions cannot be used. While Viewpoint operations (change of view) are being carried out, the normal motion will be interrupted.
2. To disconnect from the controller, press the "Disconnect" button from the "Remote
Monitoring" dialog. on the [Tool] tab, in the [Online] group, click the [Remote Monitor]
button.

Cases of Bad Connection
Losing the connection after establishing the Remote Monitor link
After the connection was properly established, if the cable is disconnected or communication
is lost for more than 5 seconds, the "Connection Failure" message is displayed and the
Remote Monitor link is terminated.
SUPPLE
-MENT
Depending on the MOTOCOM32 specifications and cause of lost of communication,
MOTOCOM32 may take some time to report the lost of communication, which will significantly increase the normal 5 seconds period before the failure message is displayed.
HW0483092
11.12 Remote Monitor Function
Bad connection when establishing connection: case 1
When starting the Remote Monitor link (on the [Tool] tab, in the [Online] group, click the
[Remote Monitor] button), if the connection cannot be properly established, the message
"Connection Failure" is displayed and the Remote Monitor Link is not made.
Bad connection when establishing connection: case 2
If the cable is properly connected but the IP address is incorrect when starting the Remote
Monitor Link (on the [Tool] tab, in the [Online] group, click the [Remote Monitor] button), the
"Remote Monitoring" dialog will display with the message "Connecting..."
After the several seconds, the "Connection Failure" message will display and the Remote
Monitor Link is not made.
NOTE
While the "Connecting..." message is displayed, MotoSim EG operation cannot be process. Please be careful to set the proper IP address.
HW0483092
11.13 Fix TCP
11.13Fix TCP
The Fix TCP function allows fixing (or attaching) the robot TCP position relative to another
model in the cell. If the robot base or the attached model is moved, the robot changes position so that it TCP remains in the same position relative to the specified model.
The Fix TCP function is enabled by the robot Position panel. Check the "Fix TCP" check box
to enable the function. The default model to which the TCP is attached is the world. To
change the model, press the "Set Fix TCP..." button to display the "Select Model" dialog.
This function is useful to determine the layout of a cell. For example the robot TCP can be
attached to a work piece. As the robot base or work piece are moved around during the layout procedure, the robot automatically adjust itself to keep its TCP in the same position on the
work piece. It then becomes obvious if the work piece become out of reach, because robot
will no longer maintain its position on the work piece.
Its can also be used when teaching a robot with external axis. After the tool has been set in
position, if the robot external axis need to be changed, with the Fix TCP function enabled the
robot tool will remains in position. This avoids having to adjust the robot tool after moving the
external axis.
NOTE
The function is automatically disabled if the Position panel is closed or if a job is played
back. The Fix TCP section is not available when the Frame is set to "Work Angle".
HW0483092
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG (YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC,
MRC, MRC II)
12 Appendix
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG
(YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC, MRC,
MRC II)
MotoSim EG ignores the instructions not on the following list.
: editable and executable;
Type
I/O
Control
Move
:
executable
Instruction
Availability
DOUT

DIN
Type
Instruction
Availability
ADD


SUB

NWAIT

MUL

WAIT

DIV

NOP

INC

‘(Comment)

DEC

*(Label)

AND

JUMP

OR

CALL

NOT

RET

XOR

TIMER

SQRT

IF

SIN

CWAIT

COS

MOVJ *1

ATAN

MOVL

SET

MOVC

SETE

IMOV

GETE

EIMOVL

CLEAR

EIMOVC

CNVRT

REFP

GETS

SPEED

SFTON

SFTOF

Calculation
Shift
HW0483092
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG (YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC,
MRC, MRC II)
*1
"MOVJ" instruction cannot be used by some robot models.
Instruction
DOUT
Description
DOUT OT#(1) ON
Numeric value
OT#
OG#
DIN
DIN B000 IN#(1)
Numeric value
OT#
OG#
B***
NWAIT
WAIT
NWAIT
WAIT IN#(1)=ON T=0.5
Numeric value
Numeric value
IN#
IG#
NOP
NOP
‘(Comment)
‘(Comment)
*(Label)
*(Label)
JUMP
JUMP JOB:MRC IF IN#(1)=ON
Refer to description of "IF"
*
JOB:
CALL
CALL JOB:MRC IF IN#(1)=ON
Refer to description of "IF"
JOB:
RET
TIMER
RET
TIMER T=0.50
Numeric value
HW0483092
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG (YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC,
MRC, MRC II)
Instruction
IF
Description
IF IN#(1)=ON
ON/OFF
Byte variable
=
Numeric value
B000
000
Array cannot be specified
IF IG#(1)=B000
Byte variable
Constant
B000
=
<>
Numeric value
000
Array cannot be specified
IF B000=100
B000
I000
D000
R000
Byte variable
Integer variable
Double precision variable
Real variable
Constant
000
Array cannot be specified
=
<>
>
>=
<
<=
Byte variable
Integer variable
Double precision variable
Real variable
CWAIT
MOVJ *1
MOVL
MOVC
B000
I000
D000
R000
000
Array cannot be specified
CWAIT
MOVJ C000 VJ=50.00 PL=0 NWAIT
MOVL C000 VJ=50.00 PL=0 NWAIT
MOVC C000 VJ=50.00 PL=0 NWAIT
Numeric value
VJ ... Only MOVJ
VR
VE MOVL, MOVC
V
PL=0
PL=1
PL=2
PL=3
PL=4
C***
*1
"MOVJ" instruction cannot be used by some robot models.
HW0483092
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG (YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC,
MRC, MRC II)
Instruction
REFP
Description
REFP 1 C000 PL=1
C***
SPEED
PL=0
PL=1
PL=2
PL=3
PL=4
SPEED VJ=50.00 V=138 VR=138.0 VE=50.00
Numeric value
Ignored
VJ
VR
VE
V
ADD
SUB
ADD B000 0
SUB B000 0
Byte variable
Integer variable
Double precision variable
Real variable
Constant
Byte variable
Integer variable
Double precision variable
Real variable
Robot position variable
Base axis variable
Station axis variable
B 000
I 000
D 000
R 000
000
Array cannot be specified
B 000
I 000
D 000
R 000
P 000
BP 000
EX 000
000
Array cannot be specified
HW0483092
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG (YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC,
MRC, MRC II)
Instruction
MUL
DIV
Description
MUL D000 D000
DIV D000 D000
B 000
I 000
D 000
R 000
Byte variable
Integer variable
Double precision variable
Real variable
Constant
Byte variable
Integer variable
Double precision variable
Real variable
000
Array cannot be specified
B 000
I 000
D 000
R 000
000
Array cannot be specified
MUL EX000 (1) D000
DIV EX000 (1) D000
Real variable
Constant
R 000
000
Array cannot be specified
Numeric value
Robot position variable
Base axis variable
Station axis variable
INC
DEC
000
Array cannot be specified
INC B000
DEC B000
Byte variable
Integer variable
Double precision variable
AND
OR
NOT
XOR
SQRT
SIN
COS
ATAN
P 000
BP 000
EX 000
AND
OR
NOT
XOR
SQRT
SIN
COS
ATAN
B000
I000
D000
000
Array cannot be specified
B000 0
B000 0
B000 0
B000 0
B000 0
B000 0
B000 0
B000 0
Variable
Constant
B 000
000
Array cannot be specified
B***
HW0483092
12.1 List of Instructions Supported by MotoSim EG (YRC1000,DX200, DX100, FS100, NX100, XRC,
MRC, MRC II)
Instruction
GETE
Description
DIV D000 P000 (1)
Numeric value
Robot position variable
Base axis variable
Station axis variable
P 000
BP 000
EX 000
D***
CLEAR
000
Array cannot be specified
CLEAR B000 0
Constant
Byte variable
Integral variable
Double precision variable
CNVRT
B000
I000
D000
000
Array cannot be specified
CNVRT PX000 PX000
Extended position variable
Extended position local variable
PX 000
LPX 000
000
Extended position variable
Extended position local variable
PX 000
LPX 000
000
GETS
GETS PX000 $PX001
Extended position status variable
$PX 000
000
Array cannot be specified
Extended position variable
PX 000
000
Array cannot be specified
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values
Supported by MotoSim EG
YRC1000

Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
AR700
1-06VX8-A00
330
Added at Ver2016
AR900
1-06VX7-A00
330
Added at Ver2016
AR1440
1-06VXH12-A00
450
Added at Ver2016
GP7
1-06VX7-A00
330
Added at Ver2016
GP8
1-06VX8-A00
330
Added at Ver2016
GP12
1-06VXH12-A00
450
Added at Ver2016
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
DX200

Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
ES165RDII
ES165RD-J00
450
Added at Ver4.10
ES200RDII
ES200RD-J00
450
Added at Ver4.10
MA1440
MA1440-A00
450
Added at Ver4.00
MA1440
MA1440-A10
450
Added at Ver5.20
MA2010
MA02010-A00
505
Added at Ver5.20
MA2010
MA02010-A10
505
Added at Ver5.20
MC2000II
MC02000-J00
680
Added at Ver5.201
MH5SII
MH0005S-J00
330
Added at Ver2016
MH5LSII
MH005LS-J00
330
Added at Ver4.10
MH12
MH12-A00
450
Added at Ver4.01
MH24
MH00024-A00
505
Added at Ver5.20
MH24-10
MH00024-A10
505
Added at Ver2016
MH50II
MH00050-J00
540
Added at Ver4.10
MH50II-20
MH00050-J10
540
Added at Ver4.10
MH50II-35
MH00050-J20
540
Added at Ver4.10
MH80II
MH00080-J00
540
Added at Ver5.20
MH110
MH110-A00
540
Added at Ver4.10
MH180
MH180-A00
650
Added at Ver4.01
MH180
MH180-C00
650
Added at Ver2016
MH180-120
MH180-A10
650
Added at Ver2016
MH215II
MH00215-J00
650
Added at Ver2016SP1
MH225
MH225-A00
650
Added at Ver4.01
MH250II
MH00250-J00
650
Added at Ver2016
MH280II
MH00280-J00
650
Added at Ver4.10
MH400II
MH00400-J00
900
Added at Ver5.20
MH600
MH00600-A00
900
Added at Ver2016
MPL80II
MPL0080-J00
540
Added at Ver4.10
MPL100II
MPL0100-J00
650
Added at Ver5.20
MPL160II
MPL0160-J00
880
Added at Ver5.20
MPL300II
MPL0300-J00
880
Added at Ver5.20
MPL800II
MPL0800-J00
880
Added at Ver2016
MPO10
MPO0010-A00
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPO10
MPO0010-C00
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPO10
MPO0010-F00
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPX3500
MPX3500-A00
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPX3500
MPX3500-A10
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPX3500
MPX3500-C00
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPX3500
MPX3500-C10
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPX3500
MPX3500-F00
0
Added at Ver5.201
MPX3500
MPX3500-F10
0
Added at Ver5.201
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
MS80WII
MS0080W-J00
540
Added at Ver2016
MS100
MS100-A00
540
Added at Ver4.10
MS165
MS165-A00
650
Added at Ver4.01
MS210
MS210-A00
650
Added at Ver4.01
UP400RDII
UP400RD-J00
1000
Added at Ver5.20
UP400RDII
UP400RD-J10
1000
Added at Ver2016
VA1400II
VA01400-J00
450
Added at Ver5.20
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
DX100

Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
DX1350D
DX1350D-A00
480
Added at Ver4.00
EP4000D
EP4000D-J72
740
Added at Ver4.00
EP4000D
EP4000D-K72
740
Added at Ver4.00
EP4000D
EP4000D-L72
740
Added at Ver4.00
EPH130D
EPH130D-A00
730
Added at Ver3.63
EPH130RLD
PH13RLD-A00
600
Added at Ver4.00
EPH4000D
EPH400D-JA0
758
Added at Ver4.00
EPH4000D
EPH400D-JB0
758
Added at Ver4.00
EPH4000D
EPH400D-KA0
758
Added at Ver4.00
EPH4000D
EPH400D-KB0
758
Added at Ver4.00
EPH4000D
EPH400D-LA0
758
Added at Ver4.00
EPH4000D
EPH400D-LB0
758
Added at Ver4.00
ES165D
ES0165D-A00
650
Added at Ver3.02
ES165D-100
ES0165D-A10
650
Added at Ver4.00
ES165RD
ES165RD-A00
450
Added at Ver3.40
ES200D
ES0200D-A00
650
Added at Ver3.02
ES200RD
ES200RD-A10
450
Added at Ver2016
ES280D-230
ES0280D-A10
650
Added at Ver3.50
HP20D
HP0020D-A00
505
Added at Ver3.02
HP20D-6
HP0020D-A10
505
Added at Ver3.62
HP20RD
HP020RD-A00
305
Added at Ver3.50
MA1400
MA01400-A00
450
Added at Ver3.01
MA1800
MA01800-A00
555
Added at Ver3.30
MA1900
MA01900-A00
505
Added at Ver3.02
MC2000
MC02000-A00
680
Added at Ver3.62
MFL2200D-2650
MFL050D-C20
827
Added at Ver4.00
MH5
MH00005-C00
330
Added at Ver3.44
MH5
MH00005-E00
330
Added at Ver3.51
MH5
MH00005-E10
330
Added at Ver3.51
MH5L
MH0005L-C00
330
Added at Ver3.44
MH5LS
MH005LS-A00
330
Added at Ver4.00
MH5S
MH0005S-A00
330
Added at Ver4.00
MH6
MH00006-A00
450
Added at Ver3.01
MH6
MH00006-C00
450
Added at Ver4.00
MH6-10
MH00006-A30
450
Added at Ver3.44
MH6S
MH0006S-A00
450
Added at Ver3.30
MH50
MH00050-A00
540
Added at Ver3.02
MH50-20
MH00050-A10
540
Added at Ver3.30
MH50-35
MH00050-A20
540
Added at Ver3.44
MH80
MH00080-A00
540
Added at Ver3.51
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
MH165
MH00165-A00
650
Added at Ver3.51
MH165
MH00165-B00
650
Added at Ver3.51
MH165-100
MH00165-A10
650
Added at Ver4.00
MH200
MH00200-A00
650
Added at Ver4.00
MH215
MH00215-A00
650
Added at Ver3.50
MH250
MH00250-A00
650
Added at Ver3.60
MH250
MH00250-B00
650
Added at Ver3.60
MH400
MH00400-A0E
900
Added at Ver4.00
MPK2
MPK0002-A00
500
Added at Ver3.41
MPK2
MPK0002-B01
420
Added at Ver3.51
MPL80
MPL0080-A00
540
Added at Ver3.44
MPL100
MPL0100-A00
880
Added at Ver3.40
MPL160
MPL0160-A00
880
Added at Ver3.10
MPL300
MPL0300-A00
880
Added at Ver3.40
MPL500
MPL0500-A00
880
Added at Ver3.50
MPL800
MPL0800-A00
880
Added at Ver3.40
MS80
MS00080-A00
540
Added at Ver3.01
MS80W
MS0080W-A00
540
Added at Ver3.60
MS80W
MS0080W-B00
540
Added at Ver3.60
MS120
MS00120-A00
680
Added at Ver3.51
SIA5D
SIA005D-A00
309.5
Added at Ver3.63
SIA10D
SIA010D-A00
360
Added at Ver3.10
SIA20D
SIA020D-A00
410
Added at Ver3.10
SIA30D
SIA030D-A00
598
Added at Ver4.00
SIA50D
SIA050D-A00
540
Added at Ver3.02
UP120ED-165
UP120ED-A10
525
Added at Ver3.50
UP350D
UP0350D-A00
900
Added at Ver3.20
UP350D-600
UP0350D-B30
900
Added at Ver3.51
UP400RD
UP400RD-A00
1000
Added at Ver4.00
UP400RD
UP400RD-A10
1000
Added at Ver2016
VA1400
VA01400-A00
450
Added at Ver3.00
VS50
VS00050-A00
540
Added at Ver3.02
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
FS100

Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
HP20F
HP0020F-A00
505
Added at Ver4.00
MHJ
MH0000J-A00
240
Added at Ver3.62
MH3BM
MH003BM-A00
350
Added at Ver4.00
MH3F
MH0003F-A00
290
Added at Ver3.62
MH5BM
MH005BM-A00
362
Added at Ver2016SP1
MH5F
MH0005F-A00
330
Added at Ver3.62
MH5LF
MH005LF-A00
330
Added at Ver4.00
MH6F
MH0006F-A00
450
Added at Ver4.00
MPK2F
MPK002F-A00
420
Added at Ver4.00
MPK2F-5
MPK002F-A20
420
Added at Ver4.00
MPL160
MPL0160-A00
880
Added at Ver4.00
MPP3
MPP0003-A00
0
Added at Ver3.60
MPP3H
MPP003H-A00
0
Added at Ver4.10
MPP3S
MPP003S-A00
0
Added at Ver4.10
SIA5F
SIA005F-A00
309.5
Added at Ver4.00
SIA10F
SIA010F-A00
360
Added at Ver3.63
SIA20F
SIA020F-A00
410
Added at Ver3.63
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
NX100

Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
DX1350N
DX1350N-A00
480
Added at Ver1.30
EA1400N
EA1400N-A00
450
EA1400N
Ceiling Mounted Type
EA1400N-A10
450
EA1800N
EA1800N-A00
555
EA1900N
EA1900N-A00
505
EA1900N
Ceiling Mounted Type
EA1900N-A10
505
Added at Ver2.50
ECH2401D-4700
ECH50D-D00
716
Added at Ver3.30
ECH2501D-4700
ECH80D-D00
716
Added at Ver3.20
ECR3J
ECR3J-A00
290
Added at Ver3.40
ECR200
ECR200-A00
735
Added at Ver2.50
ECR400R-200
ECR400R-A10
1005
Added at Ver3.40
ECR400R-400
ECR400R-B00
1005
Added at Ver3.40
ECS600N
ECS600N-A01
730
Added at Ver3.50
EH80
EH80-A00
540
Added at Ver2.10
EH130
EH130-A00
650
Added at Ver2.30
EH130
EH130-A20
650
Added at Ver2.30
EH200
EH200-A00
730
Added at Ver2.50
EH200-150
EH200-A10
730
Added at Ver2.30
EP4000N
EP4000N-J00
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-J10
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-J30
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-J40
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-J50
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-J60
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-K00
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-K10
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-K30
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-K40
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-K50
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-K60
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-L00
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-L10
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-L30
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-L40
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-L50
740
EP4000N
EP4000N-L60
740
Added at Ver1.30
EPH130
EPH130-A00
730
Added at Ver2.00
EPH130
EPH130-C24
730
Added at Ver2.60
Added at Ver2.60
Added at Ver1.20
Added at Ver1.30
Added at Ver1.20
Added at Ver1.30
Added at Ver1.20
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
EPH130R
EPH130R-A00
600
Added at Ver2.10
EPH130RL
EPH130RL-A00
600
Added at Ver2.10
EPH130RL
EPH130RL-A54
600
Added at Ver2.60
EPH130RL-85
EPH130RL-A34
600
Added at Ver2.60
EPH130RL-85
EPH130RL-A60
600
Added at Ver3.00
EPH4000
EPH4000-J01
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-J11
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-J31
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-J41
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-J51
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-J60
758
Added at Ver1.20
EPH4000
EPH4000-J71
758
Added at Ver3.00
EPH4000
EPH4000-J81
758
Added at Ver2.80
EPH4000
EPH4000-JA0
758
Added at Ver1.30
EPH4000
EPH4000-K01
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-K11
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-K31
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-K41
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-K51
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-K60
758
Added at Ver1.20
EPH4000
EPH4000-KA0
758
Added at Ver1.30
EPH4000
EPH4000-L01
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-L11
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-L31
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-L41
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-L51
758
Added at Ver1.50
EPH4000
EPH4000-L60
758
Added at Ver1.20
EPH4000
EPH4000-LA0
758
Added at Ver1.30
EPL80
EPL80-A00
540
Added at Ver2.10
EPL160
EPL160-A00
880
Added at Ver1.10
EPL160
EPL160-A10
880
Added at Ver1.10
EPL300
EPL300-A00
880
Added at Ver1.10
EPL300
EPL300-A10
880
Added at Ver1.10
EPL500
EPL500-A00
880
Added at Ver1.50
EPL500
EPL500-A10
880
Added at Ver1.50
EPX1250
EPX1250-A000
310
Added at Ver3.51
EPX2050
EPX2050-A300
600
Added at Ver3.63
EPX2050
EPX2050-A500
600
Added at Ver3.50
EPX2050
EPX2050-B500
600
Added at Ver3.50
EPX2700
EPX2700-A000
0
Added at Ver3.50
EPX2700
EPX2700-A010
0
Added at Ver3.50
EPX2700
EPX2700-A100
0
Added at Ver3.50
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
EPX2700
EPX2700-A110
0
Added at Ver3.50
EPX2750
EPX2750-A300
600
Added at Ver3.63
EPX2800
EPX2800-A000
795.5
Added at Ver3.50
EPX2800R
EPX2800R-Z000
817.5
Added at Ver2.60
EPX2800R
EPX2800R-C000
817.5
Added at Ver3.60
EPX2900
EPX2900-Z000
750
Added at Ver2.60
EPX2900
EPX2900-A000
750
Added at Ver2.70
EPX2900
EPX2900-B000
750
Added at Ver2.70
ES120N
ES120N-A00
650
Added at Ver3.02
ES120N
ES120N-A20
680
Added at Ver3.02
ES165N
ES165N-A00
650
ES165N-100
ES165N-A10
650
ES165RN
ES165RN-A00
450
ES200N
ES200N-A00
650
ES200RN
ES200RN-A00
450
ES200RN-120
ES200RN-A10
450
Added at Ver1.10
ES200TN
ES200TN-A00
650
Added at Ver2.30
ES280N
ES280N-A00
650
Added at Ver2.00
HP3
HP3-A00
300
HP3J
HP3J-J00
290
HP3L
HP3L-A00
300
HP3XF
HP3XF-A00
300
Added at Ver1.30
HP3XF
HP3XF-B00
300
Added at Ver1.30
HP5
HP5-A00
300
Added at Ver1.30
HP6
HP6-A00
450
HP6R
HP6-R00
240
Added at Ver2.00
HP6R
HP6-R10
240
Added at Ver2.00
HP6S
HP6-A10
450
Added at Ver1.10
HP20
HP20-A00
505
HP20-6
HP20-A10
505
HP20 IP65
HP20-A20
505
HP20R
HP20R-B2C
305
HP165
HP165-A00
650
IA20
IA20-A00
450
Added at Ver2.00
SIA2
SIA2-A00
314.5
Added at Ver3.60
SIA10
SIA10-A00
360
Added at Ver2.80
SIA20
SIA20-A00
410
Added at Ver2.80
SP800N
SP800N-A00
540
SSA2000
SSA3-A00
450
Added at Ver2.30
SSA2000
Ceiling Mounted Type
SSA3-A10
450
Added at Ver2.70
SSF2000
SSF6-A00
450
Added at Ver2.60
Added at Ver2.20
Added at Ver3.02
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
SSF2000R
SSF6R-A20
240
Added at Ver3.02
UP20MN
UP20MN-A00
540
UP50N
UP50N-A00
540
UP50N
UP50N-A51
540
Added at Ver2.70
UP50N
UP50N-AA1
540
Added at Ver2.80
UP50N-80
UP50N-A10
540
UP50SN
UP50N-A20
540
UP50SN
UP50N-A71
540
UP50N-35
UP50N-A30
540
UP50RN-35
UP50RN-A10
450
UP120EN-165
UP120EN-A10
525
UP130RN
UP130RN-B00
600
UP130RLN
UP130RN-A2A
600
UP130RLN
UP130RN-A2B
600
Added at Ver2.60
UP130RLN-85
UP130RN-A4A
600
Added at Ver2.60
UP350N
UP350N-A00
900
UP350N-200
UP350N-A10
900
UP350N-500
UP350N-A20
900
UP350N-600
UP350N-A30
900
UP400RN
UP400RN-A00
1000
Added at Ver2.70
Added at Ver2.10
Added at Ver3.00
Added at Ver1.20
Added at Ver1.10
NXC100

Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
HP3
HP3-A00
300
Added at Ver1.50
HP3L
HP3L-A00
300
Added at Ver1.50
HP3XF
HP3XF-A00
300
Added at Ver1.50
HP5
HP5-A00
300
Added at Ver1.50
MHJN
MHJN-A00
240
Added at Ver3.60
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
YASNAC XRC

Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
CHL2400D-4700
CHL50D-A00
718
Added at Ver1.50
CHL2400D-3700
CHL50D-A10
718
Added at Ver1.50
CHL2400D-2700
CHL50D-A20
718
Added at Ver1.50
CR3X
CR3-J00
300
Added at Ver2.60
CR20
CR20-A00
535
CR50
CR50-A00
540
CR130
CR130-A10
730
Added at Ver3.40
CR165
CR165-A20
730
Added at Ver3.40
CR165-100
CR165-A10
730
Added at Ver2.00
CR165-200
CR165-A30
730
Added at Ver1.50
CSL10
CSL10-A00
950
CSL10-460
CSL10-A10
840
CSL10-650
CSL10-A20
1030
CSL15
CSL15-A00
750
CSL15-1400
CSL15-A10
770
CSL15-1400
CSL15-A30
770
CSL15-1600
CSL15-A20
770
CSL15D
CSL15D-A00
750
CSL15D
CSL15D-B00
750
CSL15D-1400
CSL15D-A10
770
CSL15D-1400
CSL15D-B10
770
CSL15D-1400
CSL15D-B30
770
CSL15D-1600
CSL15D-B20
770
CSL600
CSL600-A00
730
CSL600D
CSL600D-A00
730
CSL600D-1400
CSL600D-A10
840
CSL1200
CSL20-A00
790
CSL1200-1600
CSL20-A10
790
CSL1200-1800
CSL20-A20
790
CSL1200-2400
CSL20-A70
790
CSL1200D
CSL20D-A00
790
CSL1200D
CSL20D-B00
790
CSL1200D
CSL20D-B30
790
CSL1200D-L
CSL20D-A10
790
CSL1200D-L
CSL20D-B10
790
CSL1200D-1800
CSL20D-B20
790
CSL1200D-1600
CSL20D-B40
790
CSL1200D-875
CSL20D-B55
790
CSL1200D-875
CSL20D-B61
790
CSL1200D-1200
CSL20D-B80
790
Added at Ver2.50
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
CSL1200D-2400
CSL20D-B90
790
CSL1300D-2440
CSL30D-A00
870
Added at Ver2.00
CSL1300SC-1800
CSL30SC-A10
900
Added at Ver2.00
CSL2200D-1800
CSL50D-A00
824
CSL2200D-2400
CSL50D-A10
824
CSL2200D-2650
CSL50D-A20
824
CSL2400D-1800
CSL80D-A00
950
CSL2400D-2400
CSL80D-A10
950
CSL2400D-1800
CSL80D-C00
950
Added at Ver1.20
CSL2400D-2400
CSL80D-C10
950
Added at Ver1.20
CSL2400S-1800
CSL80S-A00
950
CSL2400S-2400
CSL80S-A10
950
CSL2400S-2400
CSL80S-C10
950
Added at Ver1.30
CSL2500D-1800
CSL120D-A00
1059
Added at Ver2.10
CSL2500D-2400
CSL120D-A10
1050
Added at Ver1.20
CSL2500S-1800
CSL120S-A00
1059
Added at Ver2.10
CSP1500
CSP50-A00
804.5
CSP1500
CSP50-B00
804.5
CSP1500W
CSP50-C00
822
DX1350
DX1350-A00
480
EA1400
EA1400-A00
450
EA1900
EA1900-A00
535
EP3000
EP3000-A0A
600
EP4000
EP4000-A01
740
EP4000
EP4000-A11
740
EP4000
EP4000-A21
740
EP4000
EP4000-B01
740
EP4000
EP4000-B11
740
EP4000
EP4000-B21
740
EP4000
EP4000-C01
740
EP4000
EP4000-C11
740
EP4000
EP4000-C21
740
ES165
ES165-J02
650
ES165
ES165-J12
650
ES165R
ES165R-J02
450
ES200
ES200-J02
650
ES200R
ES200R-J02
450
PX800
PX800-A02
0
PX800
PX800-Floor
310
PX1450
PX1450-A20
600
PX1450
PX1450-A30
600
PX1750
PX1750-A50
600
Added at Ver2.00
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
Remarks
PX1850
PX1850-A20
600
PX1850
PX1850-A30
600
PX2050
PX2050-A20
600
PX2050
PX2050-A30
600
PX2050
PX2050-A50
600
PX2750
PX2750-A30
600
PX2850
PX2850-A00
600
PX2850
PX2850-A10
600
PX2850
PX2850-A20
600
PX2850
PX2850-A50
600
Added at Ver1.10
PX2850
PX2850-A60
600
Added at Ver1.10
PX2850
PX2850-AA0
600
PX2900
PX2900-A00
750
PX2900
PX2900-A10
750
RS65-250
RS65-250
765
SK16X
SK16-J00
585
SK16X-6
SK16-J10
585
SK16MX
SK16M-J00
760
SK45X
SK45-J00
760
SK45X-30
SK45-J10
760
SK300X
SK300-J00
900
SK506X
SK506-J00
0
SP70X
SP70-J00
0
SP100X
SP100-J00
880
SP100X-160
SP100-J10
880
SP100X-250
SP100-J20
880
SP100X-130
SP100-J30
880
SP400X
SP400-A00
800
SP400X-500
SP400-A20
800
SP800
SP800-A00
540
SR200X-150
SR200-J20
600
SR200X-150
SR200-J40
600
SV3X
SV3-J00
300
SV3X
SV3-J20
300
SV035
SV035-J00
380
UP6
UP6-A00
450
UP6
UP6-A20
450
UP6
Backward-Arm Model
UP6-A30
450
UP6R
UP6-R00
240
UP6RS
UP6-R10
240
UP20
UP20-A00
535
Added at Ver1.10
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
Model Name
Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
UP20-6
UP20-A10
535
UP20-10
UP20-A70
535
UP20M
UP20M-A00
540
UP50
UP50-A00
540
UP50S
UP50-A60
540
UP50-35
UP50-A20
540
UP50-80
UP50-A30
540
UP120E
UP120E-A00
525
UP120E-165
UP120E-A12
525
UP130
UP130-A00
730
UP130R
UP130R-A00
600
UP130RL
UP130R-A20
600
UP130S
UP130-A10
730
UP130T
UP130-T00
773
UP165
UP165-A00
730
UP165-100
UP165-A30
730
UP165-100
UP165-A40
730
UP165R
UP165R-A00
600
UP200
UP200-A00
730
UP200R
UP200-R00
600
UP350
UP350-A00
900
UP350-200
UP350-A10
900
UP350-500
UP350-A20
900
UP400R
UP400R-A00
1000
UP400R
UP400R-A10
1000
UPJ*2)
UPJ3-A00
290
UPJ*2)
UPJ3-B00
290
Remarks
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
YASNAC MRC

Model Name
Robot Type
Model File Name
Offset Value (mm)
CR45
CR45-C000
CR45-C00
760
K3
K3-C000
K3-C00
384
K5WG
K5G-A01
K5WG
685
K5WG
K5G-A01-B
K5WG
685
K6
K6-A301
K6-A30
550
K6
K6-C000
K6-C00
550
K10
K10-C000
K10-C00
585
K10-6
K10-C010
K10-C10
585
K10M
K10M-C000
K10M-C00
730
K30
K30-C000
K30-C00
730
K30
K30-C010
K30-C01
730
K60
K60-C000
K60-C00
720
K604*1)
K604-C000
K604-C00
750
K60C
K60C-A100
K60C-A10
720
K60T
K60T-C100
K60T-C10
740
K100
K100-C000
K100-C00
830
K100-120
K100-D000
K100-D00
830
K1004
K1004-C000
K1004-C00
1050
K100C
K100C-C100
K100C-C10
830
K100R
K100R-C000
K100R-C00
550
K205*1)
K205-C000
K205-C00
900
K506
K506-C000
K506-C00
570
K506
K506-C010
K506-C01
570
NY170L2
K300-C010
K300-C01
900
NY3002
K300-C000
K300-C00
900
NY400S2
K300-C020
K300-C02
900
S604
S604-C000
S604-C00
0
S604
S604-D000
S604-D00
0
S604-30
S604-C010
S604-C01
0
S604-30
S604-D010
S604-D01
0
SK6
SK6-C000
SK6-C00
530
SK6
SK6-C020
SK6-C02
530
SK6R
SK6R-C001
SK6R-C00
240
SK6R
SK6R-C011
SK6R-C01
240
SK16
SK16-C000
SK16-C00
585
SK16-6
SK16-C010
SK16-C01
585
SK16M
SK16M-C000
SK16M-C00
760
SK45
SK45-C000
SK45-C00
760
SK45-30
SK45-C010
SK45-C01
760
SK45-80
SK45-D000
SK45-D00
760
Remarks
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
Model Name
Robot Type
Model File Name
Offset Value (mm)
SK120
SK120-C000
SK120-C00
850
SK120
SK120-C053
SK120-C05
850
SK120-75
SK120-C030
SK120-C03
850
SK120-80
SK120-E000
SK120-E00
850
SK120-150
SK120-D000
SK120-D00
850
SK506
SK506-C000
SK506-C00
0
SK506
SK506-C010
SK506-C01
0
SK604
SK604-C000
SK604-C00
750
SP70
SP70-D000
SP70-D00
0
SP100
SP100-C000
SP100-C00
880
SP100-160
SP100-D000
SP100-D00
880
SR100
SR100-C000
SR100-C00
550
SR200-150
SR200-C110
SR200-C11
600
SV16
SV16-A000
SV16-A00
620
SV035
SV035-C000
SV035-C00
350
*1)
Remarks
YASNAC MRC II

Model Name
Robot Type
Model File Name
Offset Value (mm)
CR3
CR3-C000
CR3-C00
300
CR45
CR45-C000
CR45-C00
760
SK6
SK6-C000
SK6-C00
530
SK6
SK6-C020
SK6-C02
530
SK6R
SK6R-C001
SK6R-C00
240
SK6R
SK6R-C011
SK6R-C01
240
SK16
SK16-C000
SK16-C00
585
SK16-6
SK16-C010
SK16-C01
585
SK45
SK45-C000
SK45-C00
760
SK45-30
SK45-C010
SK45-C01
760
SP70
SP70-D000
SP70-D00
0
SV3
SV3-C000
SV3-C00
300
SV035
SV035-C000
SV035-C00
350
Remarks
HW0483092
12.2 List of Manipulator Models and Offset Values Supported by MotoSim EG
YASNAC ERC

Robot Type
(Model File Name)
Offset Value (mm)
K3S1
384
K5G
685
K5NG
685
K5WG
685
K6S
550
K10SH
585
K10MSB
730
K30SH
730
K30WSH
730
K60SH
720
K60COSH
720
K60CSH
720
K60TCS1
740
K100CSH
830
K100RSH
550
K100SN
1000
K120SH
830
K506NSH1*1)
570
S304SC
0
S304WSC
0
S604SC
0
S604WSC
0
*1
*2
Remarks
The robot will be displayed in a simplified image (e.g. displayed without the parallel link,
etc.) compared to the actual robot. However, there will be no problem in operating the
robot including teaching with MotoSim EG.
The models which are operated primarily with JRC can be simulated with XRC under
the following conditions:
-P-point maximum envelope.
The same P-point maximum envelope specified in the external dimension
diagram is applied. It can be used to examine the layout.
-Cycle time.
Accuracy of any calculated cycle time is not assured.
-Jobs.
Created jobs can be used exclusively for XRC; they cannot be used for JRC.
HW0483092
12.3 Reading the CAD Data with MotoSim EG
12.3 Reading the CAD Data with MotoSim EG
The CAD data must be converted into a form readable for MotoSim EG before starting the
reading operation. The following flowchart shows the data conversion operations required for
MotoSim EG.
User system
Intermediate
CAD file
Commercial
CAD converter
CATIA V5,
SolidWorks,
and other
output-enabled
CAD data
Other
CAD data
NOTE
Intermediate
CAD file
MotoSim EG
HSF
format
Data formats
IGES, VRML,
DXF, etc.
Commercial
CAD converter
HSF
format
The CAD converters "PolyTrans" and "Inovate" are not included with MotoSim EG.
Prepare such application software before the operation.
PolyTrans: Okino Computer Graphics (http://www.okino.com)
Inovate: IRONCAD (http://www.ironcad.com)
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions

When the driver has been installed with USB type key connected to
a personal computer
1. With the USB type key attached to a personal computer, delete the item registered as
"USB Token" in Device Manager.
2. Uninstall the driver (Sentinel System Driver 5.41.1(32-bit)) with "Add/Remove Programs".
3. Install the driver with key detached from personal computer.

When a older version key driver has been installed over a newer key
driver version.
In such case, the key driver may not operate properly.
Uninstall the Sentinel System Driver with Windows "Add / Remove Programs" function. Then
reinstall the Sentinel key driver. For details, please refer to section " 1.4 Hardware Key " of
the manual.

How to perform a simulation with MotoSim EG using data of actual
robots
Refer to the " 4.5 Creating a Cell with Actual Robot Data " for details.

Cell file containing HSF files don't display properly
When cell file containing HSF model files, if the HSF format version is higher than the one currently supported by MotoSimEG, the HSF file may not display properly. In the case that a
newer MotoSimEG version displays the cell properly, the newer MotoSimEG can save the cell
file in a previous MotoSimEG format. This will also save the HSF file into the corresponding
format version (Refer to section " 4.3.2 Save As " for details.) If the HSF file was generated
by a 3rd party software, look in the that software HSF export options to export the file in an
HSF format version corresponding to you current version of MotoSimEG.

MotoSimEG - CadPack Cell file compatibility
Cell file created with MotoSimEG can be used by MotoSimEG-CadPack. Cell file created with
MotoSimEG-CadPack can also be used by MotoSimEG even if CAD data (IGES,SAT) was
imported into the cell. When saving the cell, the MotoSimEG-CadPack converts imported
CAD data into HSF files. Once that conversion is done, the regular MotoSimEG can open the
file without problems.
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions

Graphic Driver Concerns
With MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later, some old version display adapters (graphic drivers) may
not properly generate memos and dimension lines. In those cases, it is necessary to upgrade
the version of the display driver. For Intel type adapter, verify that the version number is
6.14.10.4020 or later, otherwise please upgrade the display driver.
Version Verification Procedure
The following example is for a IntelR Graphics Controller on a Windows 2000 operating systems.
1. With the mouse right click on the desktop and select "Properties" from the popup menu
to display the Desktop Properties dialog.
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
2. Select the "Display" tab.
3. Click on the "Advanced" button to display the graphic driver property dialog.
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
4. Select the "IntelR Graphics Technology”ntab.
5. Verify the version. (The version is 6.13.01.3084. An upgrade is necessary.)
Version Upgrade Procedure
Download the necessary file (i.e. Win2K_XP1410.exe) from the download site and execute it.
(In this example, the http://support.intel.com/support/go/downloads site was used.)
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions

Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later: Cell Compatibility
When opening a cell saved in MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later with MotoSim EG ver. 1.X, memos
and dimension lines will not display properly. (Except for memos and dimension lines, other
entities are displayed normally).
Example of a cell created in MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 and opened in ver. 1.5
A cell saved with MotoSim EG ver. 1.X and then opened with MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later will
display the memo and dimensions arrows properly.
Example of a cell created in MotoSim EG ver. 1.5 and opened in ver. 2.0
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
NOTE Depending on the type of display adapter used, the arrow may not display in red.

Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later: File Export
Compatibility
The "hsf" and "hmf" files generated with the "File Output (hsf, hmf, html)" by MotoSim EG ver.
1.X are in version v11.00. The "hsf" and "hmf" files generated by MotoSim EG ver. 2.0 or later
are in version v13.00.
In the case that the resulting exported "html" doesn't display normally, establish an internet
connection and open the "html" file again.

Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 or later: Cell Compatibility
When opening a cell saved in MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 or later with MotoSim EG ver. 2.3 or earlier, memos and dimension lines will not display properly. (Except for memos and dimension
lines, other entities are displayed normally).
Example of a cell created in MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 and opened in ver. 2.3
A cell saved with MotoSim EG ver. 2.3 or earlier and then opened with MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 or
later can not display the background parts of the memo and dimensions arrows. But the
memo and dimensions arrows can be modified by right mouse button operation (delete / edit) .
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Example of a cell created in MotoSim EG ver. 2.3 and opened in ver. 2.5

Compatibility Concerns for MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 or later: File Export
Compatibility
The "hsf" and "hmf" files generated with the "File Output (hsf, hmf, html)" by MotoSim EG ver.
2.3 or earlier are in Hoops version v13.00 or v11.00. The "hsf" and "hmf" files generated by
MotoSim EG ver. 2.5 or later are in Hoops version v15.00.
If the resulting exported "html" doesn't display properly, establish an internet connection and
open the "html" file again (the latest driver should automatically be downloaded).

Docking Window
Some windows are dockable with any of the four directions of the main screen.
In MotoSim EG, the following windows are dockable.
• Position Panel
• OLP
• CadTree
• Variable Monitor
• Pulse Recorder
• Lap Time Panel
• Collision Detection
• Step Interval Time Panel
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Docking Operation
When the window is dragged to another position, the guide diamond is displayed in order to
re-dock the window.
Guide Diamond
When the dragged window reaches the location where want to dock it , move the pointer over
the corresponding portion of the guide diamond. The designated area is shaded. To dock the
window in the position indicated, release the mouse button.
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Floating Operation
Drag the window, and release the mouse button at places other than the guide diamond.
However, the window is "Auto Hide" enabled (
), the window can not be froated. So, make
the window "Auto Hide" dislabed (
), and float the window..
Drag
To Enable Auto Hide
Click the pushpin icon on the title bar of
the window, the window becomes "Auto
Hide" enabled (
). The window slides
out of the way. When a window is autohidden, its name appears on a tab at the
edge of the main window.
Click
The window slides out
The name appears
on a tab
To use the window, point to the tab so
that the window slides back into view.
Point to the tab
The window appears
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
The window slides out of the way when use a
different window.
The window
slides out
To Disable Auto Hide
Click the pushpin icon again on the title bar of the window, the window becomes "Auto Hide"
disabled (
).
Docking Operation with Two or More Windows
When two or more dockable windows show, it can dock not only with the main window but with
another window. However, the window is "Auto Hide" enabled (
), the window can not be
froated. So, make the window "Auto Hide" dislabed (
), and dock the window.
Drag to the another window
Release the mouse button
The window is docked
Floating Operation with Two or More Windows
Drag the window, and release the mouse button at places other than the guide diamond.
Please refer to the "Floating Operation" for details.
Docking Operation as Tab with Two or More Windows
When two or more dockable windows show, Windows are dockable also as a tab.
Drag the window and move the pointer over the center of the guide diamond (
) or drag to
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
the title bar of another dockable window and release the mouse button.
Drag to the another window
Release the mouse
button
The window is docked
Floating Operation as Tab with Two or More Windows
To float the window shown as the tab, drag it, and release the mouse button at places other
than the guide diamond.
However, the window is "Auto Hide" enabled (
), the window can not be froated. So, make
the window "Auto Hide" dislabed (
), and dock the window.
Drag
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Quick Access Toolbar

"Quick Access Toolbar" is convenient to execute a command quickly, without not changing a
ribbon tab or displaying a menu from the MotoSim EG button (
).
If prepopulate the quick access toolbar with the frequently used commands, the button of the
commands can always be displayed.
Quick Access Toobar
1. To customize the quick access toolbar, click the the following button. (
)
Customize the quick
access toolbar
2. When add the "Open" command to the quick access toolbar, click the "Open" menu.
When add the other commands, click the "More commands..." menu. The "Customize"
dialog appears.
3.
Select the tab name by "Choose commands from" list box, and the commands is dis-
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
played. Select the command, and click the [Add] button.
4. The added command is diplayed in the right side list. Click the [OK] button.
Then the command is added to the quick access toolbar.
NOTE
To delete the command button from the quick access toolbar, right-click the target button,
and click the "Remove from Quick Access Toolbar on the shortcut menu" menu.
When add or remove the two or more buttons, it can be operated efficiently in the "Customize" dialog.
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Comparison Table with the New Menu from the Old Menu and the
Old Tool Bar

Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
File
New
Open
-
-
-
-
Close
Save
-
Save As
Open Sample Cell
Export File
Relative Path
Exit
[Option Settings] dialog - [Robot Option] tab
-
Edit
Undo
[Home] - [Edit] -
Redo
[Home] - [Edit] -
Copy
[Home] - [Tools] -
Screen
Camera Scope
Scroll and Zoom
[Viewpoint Operation Switching] Bar -
Free Zoom
[Viewpoint Operation Switching] Bar Rotate
[Viewpoint Operation Switching] Bar -
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
Shift
[Viewpoint Operation Switching] Bar Center
[Viewpoint Operation Switching] Bar Z-Scroll and Zoom
[Viewpoint Operation Switching] Bar Zoom
[Viewpoint Operation Switching] Bar Zoom To Extents
[Home] - [View] -
Direction
View
[Home] - [View] -
Side
[Home] - [View] -
Top
[Home] - [View] -
Front
[Home] - [View] -
View Manager
[Home] - [View] -
Select Model
[Home] - [Model] Pick Mode
Free
[Home] - [Pick] -
Vetex
Center
Edge
Pick Object
Models
[Home] - [Pick] -
Frames
Lines
Points
Floor
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
Line Size
New Menu
[Home] - [Screen] -
Small
Medium
Large
Frame Display
[Home] - [Screen] Rendering Mode
[Home] - [Screen] -
FlatShading
GourandShading
Wireframe
SmoothTransition
Light Manager
[Home] - [Screen] -
Shadow
[Home] - [Screen] -
Memo
[Home] - [Screen] -
Dimension Line
[Home] - [Screen] -
Markup
[Home] - [Screen] -
Freehand
Circle
Rectangle
Notes
Cutting Planes
X-Cutting Planes
[Home] - [Screen] -
Y-Cutting Planes
Z-Cutting Planes
Measure
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
Distance
[Home] - [Mesurement] -
Angle
[Home] - [Mesurement] -
Robot
Add Robot
[Robot] - [Setup] Delete Robot
[Robot] - [Setup] Controller
Select Job
[Robot] - [Job] Select Master Job
[Robot] - [Job] Change Robot
Heart Beat
[Home] - [Settings] -
Information
[Robot] - [Robot] -
Playback
Cycle Time
[Simulation] - [Playback] -
Start
[Simulation] - [Playback] Hold
[Simulation] - [Playback] Pause
[Simulation] - [Playback] Step Next
[Simulation] - [Playback] Step Back
[Simulation] - [Playback] Reset Job
[Simulation] - [Playback] -
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
Data Setting
Tool Data
[Robot] - [File Settings] Tool Data Sheet
None
Set User Frame
[Robot] - [File Settings] Calculate User Frame
None
Robot Calibration
[Robot] - [File Settings] -
Soft Limit Setting
[Robot] - [File Settings] -
Trace
Clip Board
Clear
Save
[Simulation] - [Monitor] -
Configuration
Reach View
Reach View
Delete Reach View
[Robot] - [Robot] -
Cube Area View
Cube Area View
[Robot] - [File Settings] -
Delete Cube Area
Cube Area Setting
Safety Function
[Robot] - [File Settings] -
Safety Function File
Tool Interference
Model
Robot Approximate
Model
Device
Conveyor
Operation Panel
[Robot] - [External Device] -
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
Add
[Robot] - [External Device] -
Edit
[Robot] - [External Device] -
Set Conveyor Condizion File
[Robot] - [External Device] -
SoftLimit Setting
[Robot] - [External Device] -
Press
Add
[Robot] - [External Device] -
SoftLimit Setting
[Robot] - [External Device] -
Gantry
Add
[Robot] - [External Device] -
Soft Limit Setting
[Robot] - [External Device] -
Model
New Model
Edit Model
Hide/See
Model
Frame
Name
Wiring View
Model Attribute
Set Parent
Move Parent
Set File Path
Rename
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
Set Position
Property
Edit
Cut
Copy
Patsh
Delete
Fine
Model Tree View
Refresh View
Expand Tree
Models List
Save Model Group
Load Model Group
Tool
CAD Tree
[Home] - [Model] P.Pendant
P.Pendent View
[Robot] - [VPP] Job Panel
[Home] - [Teaching] Monitor
Panel View
None
Positon Panel
[Home] - [Teaching] Angle/Frame Panel
None
I/O
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
I/O Monitor
I/O Save
Simulation] - [Monitor] -
I/O Load
Connections
Setting
[Simulation] - [I/O Settings] -
Variable Monitor
[Simulation] - [Monitor] Lap Time Panel
[Simulation] - [Monitor] Play Panel
[Simulation] - [Monitor] Report Panel
None
Tool Work Panel
None
Pulse Record
[Simulation] - [Monitor] Set DoutJob
None
Teaching
OLP
[Home] - [Teaching] -
OLP Macro
None
Execute Job Editor
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] -
Parallel Shift
Rotation Shift
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] -
Paint Setting
[Simulation] - [Settings] Four Point Teaching
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] Tool Renew
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] -
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
Auto Place
New Menu
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] -
Step Motion
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] Robot Configuration
Teaching Sheet
Create
[Tool] - [Teaching Sheet] Delete
[Tool] - [Teaching Sheet] Stop
[Tool] - [Teaching Sheet] Color
With Motion
[Tool] - [Teaching Sheet] -
Create Model from Job
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] -
Update Job from Model
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] -
Export CAD File from JOB
[Tool] - [Teaching Assistance] -
StafeMaster
[Simulation] - [Playback] -
Collision Detection
[Simulation] - [Collision] Execute Soft
[Home] - [Tools] -
Servo
Configuration
[Simulation] - [Playback] -
Setting
Options
Remote Monitor
HW0483092
12.4 Frequently-Asked Questions
Old Menu and the Old Tool Bar
New Menu
Connect
[Tool] - [Online] View
Toolbar
File Bar
Edit Bar
Playback Bar
CAD Bar
Panel Bar
Camera Bar
Display Bar
Robot Bar
Memo Bar
Cutting Bar
Mesure Bar
Status Bar
Japanese
[Home] - [Settings] -
Windwos
New Window
Cascade
Tile Horizontally
Tile Vertically
Arrange Icons
Split
Help
Help
-
Version
HW0483092
MotoSim EG
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
HEAD OFFICE
2-1 Kurosakishiroishi, Yahatanishi-ku, Kitakyushu 806-0004, Japan
Phone +81-93-645-7703
Fax +81-93-645-7802
YASKAWA America Inc. (Motoman Robotics Division)
100 Automation Way, Miamisburg, OH 45342, U.S.A.
Phone +1-937-847-6200
Fax +1-937-847-6277
YASKAWA Europe GmbHRobotics Divsion )
Yaskawastrasse 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany
Phone +49-8166-90-100
Fax +49-8166-90-103
YASKAWA Nordic AB
Bredbandet 1 vån. 3 varvsholmen 392 30 Kalmar, Sweden
Phone +46-480-417-800
Fax +46-480-417-999
YASKAWA Electric (China) Co., Ltd.
22/F One Corporate Avenue No.222, Hubin Road, Huangpu District, Shanghai 200021, China
Phone +86-21-5385-2200
Fax 㸩86-21-5385-3299
YASKAWA SHOUGANG ROBOT Co. Ltd.
No7 Yongchang North Road, Beijing E&T Development AreaChina 100176
Phone +86-10-6788-2858
Fax +86-10-6788-2878
YASKAWA India Private Ltd. (Robotics Division)
#426, Udyog Vihar, Phase- IV,Gurgaon, Haryana, India
Phone +91-124-475-8500
Fax +91-124-475-8542
YASKAWA Electric Korea Co., Ltd
9F, KyoboSecuritiesBldg., 26-4, Yeouido-dong,Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul 150-737, Korea
Phone +82-2-784-7844
Fax +82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA Electric Taiwan Corporation
12F, No.207, Sec. 3, Beishin Rd., Shindian District, New Taipei City 23143, Taiwan
Phone +886-2-8913-1333
Fax +886-2-8913-1513
YASKAWA Electric (Singapore) PTE Ltd.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park, Singapore 556741
Phone +65-6282-3003
Fax +65-6289-3003
YASKAWA Electric (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
59,1st-5th Floor, Flourish Building, Soi Ratchadapisek 18,Ratchadapisek Road,
Huaykwang, Bangkok 10310, THAILAND
Phone +66-2-017-0099
Fax +66-2-017-0199
PT. YASKAWA Electric Indonesia
Secure Building-Gedung B Lantai Dasar & Lantai 1 JI. Raya Protokol Halim Perdanakusuma,
Jakarta 13610, Indonesia
Phone +62-21-2982-6470
Fax +62-21-2982-6741
Specifications are subject to change without notice
for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
C
Printed in Japan January 2017 05-12
MANUAL NO.
HW0483092
Download PDF
Similar pages